Ifd en Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 218

Image for DOS

User Manual

TeraByte Unlimited
Las Vegas, Nevada, USA
https://www.terabyteunlimited.com

Revision: 2022-02-04
Copyright © 1996-2022 by TeraByte, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

Trademarks
BootIt, BING, and TBOS are registered trademarks of TeraByte, Inc. TBScript,
TBIMount, and TBIView are trademarks of TeraByte, Inc.

Microsoft, MS, MS-DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft


Corporation.

IBM, PC-DOS and OS/2 are registered trademarks of the International Business
Machines Corporation.

All other trademarks and copyrights referred to are the property of their respective
owners.

Notices
Image for DOS was compiled using Open Watcom, which can be found at
www.openwatcom.org.

Technical Support Policy


Technical support is provided online. Software and documentation updates are
available at www.terabyteunlimited.com.

* The Image for DOS home page, with software and documentation update
information, and support resources, can be found at
www.terabyteunlimited.com/image-for-dos.

* A support knowledge base for all TeraByte Unlimited products, including Image
for DOS, can be found at kb.terabyteunlimited.com.

Registered users can email their questions to [email protected] if you


can’t find a suitable resolution via the aforementioned support resources. If we
cannot resolve the issue via email, we may provide telephone support.

Unregistered users will be provided technical support and product information


through email only.

In all cases, TeraByte Unlimited reserves the right to refuse any communication
method that would incur a cost.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 2 of 218


Table of Contents
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 5

DATA STORAGE SIZE UNIT CONVENTIONS .................................................... 5

HOW IMAGE FOR DOS WORKS ......................................................................... 6

WAYS TO USE IMAGE FOR DOS ....................................................................... 7

IMAGE FOR DOS QUICK START ........................................................................ 8

OBTAINING IMAGE FOR DOS .......................................................................... 10

INSTALLING IMAGE FOR DOS ......................................................................... 12


BOOT MEDIA AND UEFI SYSTEMS .............................................................................. 12
NAVIGATING THE IMAGE FOR DOS INTERFACE........................................... 27

CREATING BACKUPS WITH IMAGE FOR DOS ............................................... 28


CREATING A FULL BACKUP ........................................................................................ 29
SETTING IMAGE FOR DOS PROGRAM OPTIONS ........................................................... 44
UNDERSTANDING BACKUP OPTIONS ........................................................................... 47
CREATING A DIFFERENTIAL OR INCREMENTAL BACKUP ................................................ 51
CONSOLIDATING A BACKUP CHAIN.............................................................................. 58
UNDERSTANDING CONSOLIDATE BACKUP OPTIONS ..................................................... 64
USING IMAGE FOR DOS TO RESTORE A BACKUP ....................................... 68
RESTORING FROM A BACKUP WITH IMAGE FOR DOS ................................................... 68
GEOMETRY SETTINGS ............................................................................................... 75
UNDERSTANDING RESTORE OPTIONS FOR AN ENTIRE DRIVE ....................................... 77
UNDERSTANDING RESTORE OPTIONS FOR AN INDIVIDUAL PARTITION ........................... 81
VALIDATING BACKUPS WITH IMAGE FOR DOS............................................. 86
VALIDATING A BACKUP............................................................................................... 86
UNDERSTANDING VALIDATION OPTIONS...................................................................... 91
COPYING PARTITIONS OR DRIVES WITH IMAGE FOR DOS ........................ 92
COPYING A PARTITION OR DRIVE................................................................................ 92
UNDERSTANDING COPY OPTIONS............................................................................... 97
USING SIMPLE OPERATIONS MODE ............................................................ 102
CREATING A BACKUP ............................................................................................... 102
RESTORING A BACKUP ............................................................................................ 104
VALIDATING A BACKUP............................................................................................. 106
COPY A HARD DRIVE ............................................................................................... 106
INSTALLING IMAGE FOR DOS MANUALLY ................................................... 109
CREATING A DOS BOOT DISKETTE FROM WINDOWS 95/98/ME .................................. 110

Image for DOS User Manual Page 3 of 218


CREATING A DOS BOOT DISKETTE FROM WINDOWS XP/VISTA .................................. 110
STARTING IMAGE FOR DOS AUTOMATICALLY UPON BOOT ......................................... 110
AUTOMATICALLY RUNNING IMAGE FOR DOS FROM WINDOWS 95/98 .......................... 110
CREATING A NETWORK BOOT DISKETTE ................................................................... 111
CUSTOMIZING CDBOOT.F35 .................................................................................. 111
DEPLOYING YOUR IMAGE ............................................................................. 114

IMAGE FOR DOS ADVANCED CONFIGURATION OPTIONS ........................ 115


IMAGE FOR DOS INI FILE......................................................................................... 115
IMAGE FOR DOS ENVIRONMENT VARIABLES ............................................................. 115
IMAGE FOR DOS FILE PATH VARIABLES .................................................................... 116
RUNNING IMAGE FOR DOS FROM THE COMMAND LINE ........................... 118
IMAGE FOR DOS BACKUP OPTIONS .......................................................................... 140
IMAGE FOR DOS RESTORE OPTIONS........................................................................ 153
IMAGE FOR DOS VALIDATE OPTIONS........................................................................ 169
IMAGE FOR DOS COPY OPTIONS ............................................................................. 174
IMAGE FOR DOS LIST OPTIONS................................................................................ 185
IMAGE FOR DOS COMBINE OPTIONS ........................................................................ 186
IMAGE FOR DOS HASH OPTIONS.............................................................................. 190
TROUBLESHOOTING ...................................................................................... 191

APPENDIX A: UNDERSTANDING THE TYPES OF BACKUPS ...................... 192


FILE-BASED BACKUP ............................................................................................... 192
SECTOR-BASED BACKUP ......................................................................................... 192
APPENDIX B: BACKUP STRATEGIES ............................................................ 193
FULL BACKUPS ....................................................................................................... 193
INCREMENTAL BACKUPS .......................................................................................... 193
DIFFERENTIAL BACKUPS .......................................................................................... 194
APPENDIX C: INTRODUCTION TO HARD DRIVE STORAGE ....................... 196
THE PHYSICAL HARD DRIVE ..................................................................................... 196
THE LOGICAL HARD DRIVE—HARD DRIVE DATA ORGANIZATION ................................ 196
APPENDIX D: RESTORING TO A SMALLER DRIVE OR PARTITION............ 199
PREPARING FOR THE MOVE ..................................................................................... 201
EXAMPLES .............................................................................................................. 206
GLOSSARY ...................................................................................................... 209

WHAT IS SHAREWARE? ................................................................................. 211

TERABYTE UNLIMITED (TRIAL-USE) LICENSE AGREEMENT ..................... 212

TERABYTE UNLIMITED (FULL-USE) LICENSE AGREEMENT ...................... 215

Image for DOS User Manual Page 4 of 218


System Requirements
* IBM-compatible personal computer (Pentium or newer)

* 32-MB RAM

* Recommended: External hard drive

Note: You can use a writable CD, DVD, or BD drive, but the external hard drive is
the preferred method.

Warning to Windows 8.x/10/11 Users

You must disable the Windows Fast startup option or you risk corruption of your
partitions and data when the partitions are used outside of Windows (e.g. you boot
into Image for Linux after shutdown and save an image to a data drive).

To disable using Windows: Press WinKey+X (or right-click the Start button) and
select Power Options from the Quick Link menu. If using Windows 10 1703 or later,
the Power & sleep section of Settings will open and you will need to click the
Additional power settings link to open the Control Panel. In the Control Panel
window, click the Choose what the Power buttons do from the links on the left. Then
click on the Change settings that are currently unavailable link (located in the top
area). Remove the checkmark from the Turn on fast startup (recommended) option
under Shutdown settings and then click the Save changes button.

To disable using TBI Notify: Right-click the TBI Notify tray icon and select
Settings from the menu. Click the Disable Fast Startup button.

To disable using BootIt UEFI or BooIt BM: Boot into BootIt, click Partition Work
on the desktop, then select the Windows 8.x/10/11 partition and click Properties.
Click the Disable Fast Start button.

Data Storage Size Unit Conventions


Since Image for DOS and this document refer to data storage size units, this
section provides clarification on the definitions we use. Storage device
manufacturers typically define gigabytes (GB) in base decimal, where 1 GB = 1,000
MB = 109 bytes = 1,000,000,000 bytes. Microsoft Windows, on the other hand,
defines GB in base binary, where 1 GB = 1,024 MB = 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824
bytes.

Because of the confusion that can result when these different data storage size unit
conventions are each referred to as “gigabytes”, the gibibyte (along with the
kibibyte, mebibyte, etc.) was established in 1998 by the International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). A gibibyte (abbreviated GiB) is a base binary
unit, so 1 GiB = 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes. The IEC retained the term
gigabyte to refer to base decimal, where 1 GB = 109 bytes = 1,000,000,000 bytes.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 5 of 218


Image for DOS and this document will follow IEC recommendations, and will thus
use the terms megabyte (MB), gigabyte (GB), etc. to refer to base decimal, and
mebibytes (MiB), gibibytes (GiB), etc. to refer to base binary. So, when you read
about the data storage size convention used by Windows, the units will appear as
mebibytes (MiB) or gibibytes (GiB), even though Windows itself refers to the units
as megabytes (MB) or gigabytes (GB).

How Image for DOS Works


Image for DOS (IFD) is a backup and restore program that is designed to function
in the DOS operating environment but can back up a hard disk containing any type
of operating system. Image for DOS protects your system by creating a
compressed or uncompressed “snapshot” of all used areas of your FAT, FAT32,
NTFS, Ext2/3/4, ReiserFS, or HSF+ partition or volume. For other file systems, it
saves and restores a compressed or uncompressed snapshot of all sectors in the
partition or volume, both used and unused areas.

The snapshot backup created by Image for DOS is referred to as an image. You
can write the image backup to a set of files that you store in a different partition of
the hard drive you are backing up, on an external hard drive, on a network drive, or
directly to most USB 2, IEEE 1394, ATAPI CD-R/RW, or DVD/RW drives. Image for
DOS can also work with drives that make use of ASPI drivers, if you provide the
appropriate DOS-based driver.

When you create the image, the file system and files are backed up exactly as they
are stored on the sectors of your hard drive at the time you make the backup,
effectively taking a snapshot of your hard drive at the time you create the image.
Image for DOS does not examine the files on your hard drive to make decisions
about whether they should be backed up.

Note: See Appendix A: Understanding the Types of Backups on Page 192 for a
description of file-based backups vs. sector-based backups. Appendix B: Backup
Strategies on Page 193 describes the types of backup strategies you can use,
and the strategy you choose plays an important role when you need to restore a
backup.

When you create a backup using Image for DOS, you back up not only your data
files but also the operating system in its entirety. To understand the full impact of
having an image backup, suppose that you install a program to test it and discover
it is not what you expected. You attempt to uninstall it and it misbehaves. Before
you know it, the fully functional, well-behaved computer you fondly remember from
30 minutes ago is gone, and, in its place, you now have a devil child that won’t even
boot. If you restore an image backup taken before you installed the errant program,
you effectively remove all traces of the program—your computer returns to the state
it was in before you installed the errant program and life goes on as if the errant
program never existed on your hard drive. To understand the technical details of
how Image for DOS creates a sector-based image, see Appendix C: Introduction to
Hard Drive Storage on Page 196.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 6 of 218


After backing up with Image for DOS, your computer is protected from crashes,
data loss, hardware problems, and malicious software (i.e. viruses), since you can
restore the snapshot image whenever necessary.

You can view individual files or folders from an image backup by using the free
TBIView and TBIMount add-ons. You can obtain these from
www.terabyteunlimited.com or, if you purchased a disk-based version of Image for
DOS, you’ll find TBIView on your installation media. Note: TBIView and TBIMount
are not supported in the DOS environment.

The images you create using Image for DOS are fully compatible with the other
TeraByte Unlimited Version 3 imaging programs, such as Image for Windows and
Image for Linux. For example, you can create an image using Image for DOS and
restore it using Image for Windows. The reverse is also true: Images created by
other TeraByte Unlimited imaging programs are compatible with Image for DOS.
Images created with the TeraByte Unlimited Version 2 imaging programs are also
fully supported.

Ways to Use Image for DOS


You can use Image for DOS in a variety of ways:

* Local Usage: You can boot with your Image for DOS media (i.e. CD/DVD, USB
flash drive, or floppy diskette), and backup the operating system partition on
your hard disk. Store your image backups on a secondary hard drive partition,
on an external hard drive, or on CD/DVD/BD discs. Then, when you need to
restore, boot from your Image for DOS media again, and use Image for DOS to
restore using an Image for DOS image.

* Across a Network: You can create a network-capable DOS diskette (not


included), and then use Image for DOS to create an image file to a mapped
network drive. You also can restore an image file from a mapped network drive.
You can use preboot execution environment (PXE) push technology (not
included) to automatically start the backup or restore across a network.

* With a Hidden Recovery Partition: You can find information on setting up a


hidden recovery partition in this KB article.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 7 of 218


Image for DOS Quick Start
In this section, you’ll find a general overview of the major processes Image for DOS
can perform: backing up, restoring, and validating an existing backup image. Each
of these processes is described in detail, including pictures, later in this manual.

Warning to Windows 8.x/10 Users: You must disable the Windows Fast startup
option or you risk corruption of your partitions and data. For instructions see
“System Requirements” on page 5.

To make a full backup of a drive or partition using Image for DOS, follow these
steps:

Note: For detailed steps on creating a full backup, see the section, “Creating
Backups with Image for DOS” on Page 28.

1. Create the boot media that contains Image for DOS using either the MakeDisk
utility that comes with Image for DOS or using an alternative method.

* To read about creating the Image for DOS boot media using the MakeDisk
utility, see the section, “Installing Image for DOS” on Page 12.

* To read about other ways to create the Image for DOS boot media, see the
section, “Installing Image for DOS Manually” on Page 109.

2. Boot the computer that you want to back up using the Image for DOS boot
media.

3. Using the Image for DOS menus, select a drive or partition to back up.

* For details on using the Image for DOS menus, see the section, “Navigating
the Image for DOS Interface” on Page 27.

4. Select the target location where you want to store the backup image file(s).

5. Provide a name for the backup image file.

6. Set backup options.

* For details on available backup options, see the section, “Understanding


Backup Options” on Page 47.

You can make a differential or incremental backup using the same steps; you
simply select the Changes Only option on the Image for DOS menu instead of the
Full Backup option. For details on backup strategies—that is, deciding whether to
make full backups or use a combination of full backups and differential or
incremental backups—see Appendix B: Backup Strategies on Page 193. For details
on creating a differential or incremental backup, see the section, “Creating a
Differential or Incremental Backup” on Page 51.

You can restore an Image for DOS backup using these steps:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 8 of 218


Note: For detailed steps to restore a backup, see the section, “Using Image for
DOS to Restore a Backup” on Page 68.

1. Boot your computer using the Image for DOS boot media.

2. On the Image for DOS main menu, select Restore.

3. Select the source location that contains the backup image file that you want to
restore.

4. Select the backup image file you want to restore.

5. Select the target location that you want Image for DOS to overwrite with the
information contained in the backup image file.

6. Set restore options.

* For details on available restore options when you are restoring an entire
drive, see the section, “Understanding Restore Options for an Entire Drive”
on Page 77.

* For details on available restore options when you are restoring an individual
partition, see the section, “Understanding Restore Options for an Individual
Partition” on Page 81.

You can validate a backup as you create it or, if you don’t have time to validate it
when you create it, you validate it later. Follow these steps:

Note: For detailed steps to validate a backup, see the section, “Validating
Backups with Image for DOS” on Page 86.

1. Boot your computer using the Image for DOS boot media.

2. On the Image for DOS main menu, select Validate.

3. Select the source location that contains the backup image file that you want to
validate.

4. Select the backup image file you want to validate.

5. Set validation options.

* For details on available validation options, see the section, “Understanding


Validation Options” on Page 91.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 9 of 218


Obtaining Image for DOS
You can download either the unregistered trial version, or the registered version
of Image for DOS:

* If you have not purchased Image for DOS, click here to download the
unregistered trial version.

https://www.terabyteunlimited.com/image-for-dos/

* If you have purchased Image for DOS, click here to display a product download
form for obtaining the registered version. You will need to provide your name,
email address, and Image for DOS order number.

https://www.terabyteunlimited.com/product-download.php

The file you download is a compressed file that contains at least these files:

* CDBOOT.F35 is the file required to create a bootable CD/DVD. Based on


information stored in CDBOOT.INS, Image for DOS will look in the current
directory for CDBOOT.F35 during the creation of a CD/DVD and use it to create
a bootable disc.

About CDBOOT.F35

You use CDBOOT.F35 to create a bootable CD or DVD; CDBOOT.F35 is an


image of a bootable 3.5-inch floppy diskette. Image for DOS is contained within
CDBOOT.F35, allowing you to both back up and restore as needed.

If you use the trial version of Image for DOS to create a bootable CD or DVD,
you will be able to restore that image for 30 days. After that time, you will only be
able to restore that image using a registered version of Image for DOS.

Registered copies of Image for DOS include a full-use version of CDBOOT.F35


that allows you to both boot with any CD or DVD you create with the software
and restore any images you create, free of any time restriction.

Based on information stored in CDBOOT.INS, Image for DOS expects


CDBOOT.F35 to appear in the current directory of the DOS environment. This
may be of importance to you if you plan to create and use your own custom
batch file with Image for DOS. For information on customizing CDBOOT.F35, see
the section, “Installing Image for DOS Manually” on Page 109.

* CDBOOT.INS is used to control the content and configuration of bootable


CD/DVD discs created by Image for DOS and used to store images.

* IMAGE.EXE is the Image for DOS program.

* IFD_EN_MANUAL.PDF is a copy of this manual.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 10 of 218


* LICENSE.TXT is a copy of the Image for DOS license agreement.

* MAKEDISK.CFG is the MakeDisk configuration file for Image for DOS.

* MAKEDISK.EXE is the MakeDisk utility, which allows you to easily create


bootable media to run Image for DOS.

* ORDER.TXT is an order form for Image for DOS (included in the trial version
only).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 11 of 218


Installing Image for DOS
Image for DOS is not “installed” in the usual sense of the word. Instead, you run
Image for DOS by creating a bootable floppy diskette or CD/DVD disc that contains
the Image for DOS program. Then, you simply boot with that disc or diskette to run
Image for DOS.

Note: Image for DOS GUI can be installed as part of TeraByte’s BootIt Bare Metal
program. In this case, it can be run by booting into BootIt BM and selecting the Disk
Imaging icon on the desktop.

Boot Media and UEFI Systems

Computer systems that come from the manufacturer with Windows 8 or later
installed include a new BIOS interface known as the Unified Extensible Firmware
Interface (UEFI). This new BIOS interface boots media differently than a traditional
BIOS. Microsoft also requires these systems to use a feature of UEFI called Secure
Boot. When Secure Boot is enabled, the system will only boot items that have a
digital signature that is included in the system firmware. The manufacturers include
a digital certificate, provided by Microsoft, to boot Windows on their systems.
Secure boot can be disabled (on non-ARM systems) to allow you to boot other
operating systems and environments. Boot media must be specifically created for
UEFI to allow UEFI to boot from it. However, most systems also include the ability
to boot traditional boot media though a method or mode typically called Legacy or
BIOS.

Using TeraByte Boot Media on UEFI Systems

When creating the boot media for a UEFI system it’s important to understand which
media will boot properly on the UEFI system. System settings may require changing
to boot Image for Linux or Image for DOS depending on the implementation of UEFI
on the system.

• TBWinRE and TBWinPE (the Image for Windows boot media) support
booting via CD or USB flash drive on UEFI systems. The BIOS can be in
either UEFI mode or Legacy mode. Secure Boot is supported for TBWinRE
created on Windows 8.x/10 systems and for TBWinPE created using the
Windows 8.x/10 ADK.

TBWinRE is automatically installed with Image for Windows on Windows


7/8.x/10. You must run TBWinPE/RE Builder (or the TBWinRE script) to
create your boot media.

• Image for Linux (IFL) supports booting via CD or USB flash drive on UEFI
systems (Secure Boot is supported).

• Image for DOS (IFD) will not boot on UEFI systems configured in UEFI
mode. To boot on these systems Secure Boot must be disabled and you
must enable or use Legacy mode.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 12 of 218


Creating the Image for DOS Boot Media

If you use Windows, you can create a bootable Image for DOS CD, USB flash
drive, or diskette using the MakeDisk utility, which is included with Image for DOS.

If you use an operating system platform that doesn’t support MakeDisk or if you
wish to control the contents of the bootable media that you create, see the
section, “Installing Image for DOS Manually” on Page 109 to create the bootable
media that contains Image for DOS.

Follow these steps to use the MakeDisk utility to create the bootable Image for DOS
media; the MakeDisk utility is included in the ZIP archive file along with Image for
DOS:

1. Extract the contents of the Image for DOS ZIP archive file to a folder of your
choice.

Note: If you are using a version of Windows that has a built-in compressed
folders feature (e.g. Windows Me, XP, or later), you can double-click the ZIP file
and then open the File menu and choose Extract All… in Windows Explorer to
extract the contents.

2. Double-click MAKEDISK.EXE. The MakeDisk welcome screen appears. If you


would like to save the selections you make as you step through the wizard,
check the “Save selections for next time” box. (Selections will only be saved if
boot media is created.)

3. Click Next on the MakeDisk welcome screen. The “Select the product to build”
screen appears. Image for DOS can operate in simple or traditional mode.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 13 of 218


Select the operating mode you wish to use (the mode can be changed at any
time in program settings) and click Next.

Selecting “Simple” will enable Simple Operations mode. This allows Image for
DOS to automatically handle most options for you. Backup, Restore, Validate,
and Copy operations are available in this mode. Refer to Using Simple
Operations Mode on page 102 for details.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 14 of 218


4. The “License Agreement” screen appears. Read the Image for DOS license
agreement, and if you accept it, select the “I accept the agreement” button and
click Next.

5. If you are creating the Image for DOS (GUI) boot media or any optional
components were found, the “Select the optional components” screen will be
displayed. Otherwise, the “Device and Checkbox Options” screen will be
shown (skip to Step 6).

Only options for found components will be displayed. Component files must be
placed in the folder with MakeDisk (makedisk.exe).

* CD Boot Image Files – Depending on the boot media type being created (e.g.
floppy disk) you may need to exclude the CD Boot Image files to save space.
These files are needed to make any direct burned discs bootable (e.g. when
you save a backup image directly to a DVD).

* TeraByte Command Script Processor – The TBCMD.EXE file was found. If


this option is enabled, the boot media will run tbcmd.exe on startup.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 15 of 218


* Startup Command Script – The startup.tbs script file was found. If this
option is enabled, this script will be run on startup. You must also include the
TeraByte Command Script Processor to use this option (include TBCMD.EXE).
Note that you need to include the TeraByte OSD Tool if you need to run a
script that uses any of the TBOSDT extensions.

* TeraByte OSD Tool – The tbosdt.exe program file was found and will be
included if this option is enabled. Note that this must be the DOS version of the
TBOSDT program.

* IFD.INI file from the local directory – The IFD.INI file was found. If you
select this option it will be included in the build. This allows you to use an
already customized version of the file (you will not be prompted for IFD
options/settings).

Select the desired optional components to include and click Next.

If using Image for DOS (CUI) skip to Step 6. The following options apply only
to Image for DOS (GUI).

The “Mouse Support” screen is displayed. Select to enable or disable mouse


support and then click Next. Note that the BIOS must support the mouse. This
may require enabling the USB Legacy Support in the BIOS.

The “Video Method” screen is displayed. Select the desired video method and
then click Next.

* VESA Video – Uses the VESA Video standard for the display instead of a
specific chipset implementation. Support is provided by the video card’s BIOS.
This is the recommended video method. Will fall back to Chipset Video if
VESA is not supported.

* Chipset Video – Attempts to access the video chipset directly for supported
chipsets. It is not recommended to select this option unless you know for
certain it is required (e.g. VESA doesn’t work or you’re instructed to use it by
TeraByte support). Will fall back to VESA Video if chipset detected is not
supported.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 16 of 218


Note: While each video method should fall back to the other one if it fails, this
may not always happen. In this case, try the other video method.

The “Video Mode” screen will be displayed. Select the desired video mode and
then click Next. For the best viewing experience, it is recommended to select
800x600 or higher with 64K colors.

6. If you selected “Simple” in Step 3 skip to Step 10. Otherwise, the “Device and
Checkbox Options” screen is displayed.

Check boxes to enable the options:

* ATAPI DMA (PATA) – If your PATA CD/DVD drive supports ATAPI DMA,
enabling this option dramatically speeds up the process of reading from and
writing to the CD/DVD drive. This option will not work with some drives;
therefore, if you enable this option and have problems using your CD/DVD
drive with Image for DOS, recreate the boot media and leave the option
disabled.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 17 of 218


* Disable SATA – Image for DOS includes low level support for SATA when
the SATA controller is configured in AHCI mode. If the BIOS doesn’t provide
enough information to allow Image for DOS to identify the SATA drives
when Image for DOS takes control of the SATA drives, Image for DOS may
default to using the BIOS drive; in this case, the system will hang until the
BIOS returns control (if ever). If you experience hangs and/or the inability to
access a hard drive without an error message, recreate the boot media with
the Disable SATA checkbox checked.

* Disable SATA Bias – Because some systems have no support whatsoever


to match BIOS and SATA drives (see paragraph above), Image for DOS
employs a special matching routine to try to identify the BIOS drives that
relate to each SATA drive. In some cases, Image for DOS might
inadvertently match a BIOS drive to a SATA drive incorrectly. If you
experience such an issue, recreate the boot media with the Disable SATA
Bias checkbox checked.

* USB 1.1 (UHCI) – If you need USB 1.1 (UHCI) support for older systems
that don’t support USB 2.0, enable this option. In addition, some new
systems require this option or the USB port will hang and Image for DOS
won’t detect any USB devices. USB 2.0 support is always enabled
regardless of this option.

* Correct USB Hang (1) – If you experience problems with USB devices
hanging, you can enable this option to attempt to correct it. This option can
degrade USB IO performance.

* Correct USB Hang (2) – If you experience problems with USB devices
hanging, you can enable this option to attempt to correct it. This option can
degrade USB IO performance.

* Disable Checkbox Selection – Disables the use of check boxes to select


partitions and makes partition selection function the same as previous
versions.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 18 of 218


7. Click Next, and the “Global Geometry Options” screen appears.

Check boxes to enable the options:

* Disable Global Geometry - Check this box to disable the global geometry
settings and revert to using program defaults or drive specific overrides
equivalent to versions prior to version 2.52.

* Disable Align MBR for BIOS Auto Mode - The Align MBR for BIOS Auto
Mode option is enabled by default to prevent problems with unaligned
partitions on systems with their BIOS using Auto Mode. Many newer
systems use auto mode by default, and some even don't have an option to
turn it off. Check the box if you want to disable this option.

* Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries – This option provides a convenient


way to enable 1MiB partition alignment for all drives (drives with 512 byte
sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors; drives with 4096 byte sectors will be
aligned on 256 sectors). This is popular with users of SSD type drives. It is
the equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align on 1MiB
Boundaries, Align MBR Ending HS, Align MBR HS when Truncated, and
disabling Align on End.

* Assume Same Target System – Enable this option to prevent problems


where users restore an image from another system to a drive that will be put
back in the other system. For example, the hard drive from PC-A is backed
up; PC-B is used to restore to a new hard; that new drive is placed back in
PC-A. Without this option enabled, Image for DOS would setup the partition
to properly boot on the hard drive for PC-B which can sometimes (not
always) be a problem when the hard drive is going back to PC-A. This

Image for DOS User Manual Page 19 of 218


option solves that and is equivalent to the individual Use MBR Geometry
override.

* Use Source Host Geometry - This option is the global equivalent to the
individual Use Original Geometry override.

* Disable Validate Geometry Before Use – The Validate Geometry Before


Use option is enabled by default and used to ensure that the geometry from
the MBR on the original system is aligned to known standards before
accepting it for use. Check this box to disable this option.

Note: The above options are also available in Image for DOS by clicking the
Settings button (IFD GUI) or selecting Global Settings (IFD CUI).

8. Click Next, and the “Miscellaneous Global Options” screen appears.

Check boxes to enable the options:

* Simple Operations – Enable this option to have Image for DOS


automatically handle most options for you. You simply choose which
physical drive you want to back up and, if needed, which drive you want to
save to – the target storage area is automatically maintained and files are
deleted as needed when it runs out of free space. Backup, Restore,
Validate, and Copy are available in Simple Operations mode.

* Use Windows 9x MBR – Windows Vista and later tied the kernel loader to
the MBR code such that using previous MBR code may not allow Windows
Vista or later to boot on certain machines. Leave this option unselected (the
default) to have Image for DOS use the code base compatible with
Windows Vista or later. The new MBR code will continue to boot older

Image for DOS User Manual Page 20 of 218


OSes with the exception of some (rare) configurations using Win9x on
FAT32.

* Disable Automatic Scaling Restrictions – Select to have Image for DOS


scale small partitions when restoring a full drive image. By default, small
partitions will not be scaled and will be restored at their original sizes.

* Disable Automatic Boot Partition Updates – Select to prevent Image for


DOS from automatically updating the boot partition when restoring a full
drive image.

* Disable Automatic Restore Drive Search – Select to prevent Image for


DOS from searching for the destination drive using the disk signature or
GUID when performing an automatic restore (USB, 1394, and virtual drives
will not be searched). If a match isn’t found or if this option is enabled, the
drive number of the backed up drive will be used.

* Retain Failed Backups – If you enable this option and a backup operation
fails, Image for DOS won’t delete the files from the failed backup.

* Completion Alarm – Select to enable an audible alarm upon completion of


an operation, errors, or when user interaction is required (insert media, etc.).

* Disable Resize with Caching – Select to prevent Image for DOS from
using a cache to reduce the time required to resize a partition. By default,
the Resize with Caching option is enabled.

Note: The above options are also available in Image for DOS by clicking the
Settings button (IFD GUI) or selecting Global Settings (IFD CUI).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 21 of 218


9. Click Next, and the “Additional IFD.INI Options” screen appears. Most of the
options you should set to use Image for DOS are set for you by default, but
you can use this screen to set additional options. For example, you might want
to use the TimeZone variable to identify your time zone for Image for DOS. Or
you might want the Scale to Fit option enabled by default to expand partitions
when restoring. Note that for non-global options (those not in the [Options]
section) you will need to specify the section (e.g. [Restore_Defaults]). See
image below for examples. For a complete list of available environment
variables, see the section, “Image for DOS Environment Variables” on Page
115.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 22 of 218


10. Click Next, and the “License/Product Key” screen appears. If you own a
licensed copy of Image for DOS, supply your licensed name and product key.
(You will not be prompted to enter license information when creating boot
media for the trial version.)

11. Click Next, and the “Select Target” screen appears. Choose the target that
MakeDisk should use to create the bootable Image for DOS media.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 23 of 218


* If you choose the “ISO File” option, also supply an ISO file name in the box
provided.

* If you choose the “3 ½ Floppy” option, be sure to insert a floppy diskette


before proceeding. The entire contents of this floppy diskette will be
overwritten.

* If you choose the “CD/DVD” option, be sure to insert a writable CD or DVD


disc before proceeding. The entire contents of this disc will be overwritten.

MakeDisk can automatically overwrite CD-RW, and DVD+RW media. However, if


you wish to use DVD-RW media, it must be either brand new or fully blanked
before being processed by MakeDisk. To fully blank the DVD-RW media, use
your burning software’s “full erase” function. (The “quick erase” function will not
work for this purpose.)

* If you select a USB flash drive (UFD), you also must select the USB Layout
to use: Normal, No Partition, Partition, or Partition Ex—whichever works on
your computer; your computer’s BIOS determines which option works.

By default, for data safety reasons, MakeDisk does not support UFD devices that
are larger than 64 GB in size. For that reason, devices larger than 64 GB will not
appear in MakeDisk. You can allow MakeDisk to support larger devices by
clicking the USB+ button or by specifying the /nousblimit parameter when it's run
(e.g. makedisk /nousblimit).

Normal - Raw Boot Image – Creates a 1.44 MB floppy diskette image


on the UFD. Any additional space on the UFD (beyond the floppy image
size) is not available for use. Think of this option as if MakeDisk were
formatting the UFD to be a 1.44 MB floppy. If you were to view the UFD
in Windows, the drive would appear to be 1.44 MB, even though it might
have originally been a 4 GB drive, and formatted as FAT.

No Partition - FAT/FAT32 Volume – The entire UFD is configured as


one big unpartitioned device. If you were to view a 4 GB UFD created
using this option in Windows, you’d see free space beyond the amount
used by MakeDisk up to the size of the drive. This free space is
available to be used normally. If the UFD is 4GB or smaller, it's
formatted as FAT. Otherwise, it's formatted as FAT32.

Partition - MBR FAT/FAT32 Partition – The entire UFD is used as a


single bootable partition. The computer's BIOS will usually detect this
type of UFD as a hard drive. Any unused space on the UFD is available
to be used normally. If the UFD is 4GB or smaller, it's formatted as FAT.
Otherwise, it's formatted as FAT32.

Partition - MBR FAT/FAT32 Partition (Int13h Extensions) – This is


the same as the Partition - MBR FAT/FAT32 Partition mode except that
the INT 13 Extension is used (this is required for some computers to
boot a UFD).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 24 of 218


Multi-Partition – MBR FAT/FAT32 (+exFAT) – Will create a small FAT
or FAT32 partition for IFD and create an exFAT partition in the remaining
space. If this layout already exists, MakeDisk can update the IFD
partition and leave the exFAT partition unchanged.

Multi-Partition – MBR FAT/FAT32 (Int13h Extensions) (+exFAT) –


This is the same as the Multi-Partition – MBR FAT/FAT32 (+exFAT)
mode except the INT 13 Extension is used (this is required for some
computers to boot a UFD).

The Geometry Calculation Method options control how the drive


geometry is calculated for the USB/SD device. It is recommended to try
the Default option first. If the device fails to boot properly (e.g. black
screen, boot failure, device not found, etc.), the other options can be
tried. Make note of which option works properly for future use.

Note: More information on using UFD boot media can be found in this
TeraByte KB article

12. Click Finish, and respond to subsequent prompts as necessary. MakeDisk will
then create the boot media or ISO image. When it is done, the Success screen
appears, as shown below.

13. Click Close on the MakeDisk Success screen.

* If you selected the “3½ Floppy”, “CD/DVD”, or “USB/SD” option in Step 11,
you can now use that media to boot and run Image for DOS.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 25 of 218


* If you selected the “ISO File” option in Step 11, you will have to use other
CD/DVD authoring software to create a bootable disc from the ISO file.
(TeraByte’s BurnCDCC utility can be used for this.)

Tip: Be sure to test your boot media to make sure that it works and you can see
backup images you made previously.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 26 of 218


Navigating the Image for DOS Interface
To select menu items in Image for DOS, use the arrow keys to select the desired
option and then press Enter to display the next screen. Some screens, such as the
Backup Options screen, contain several sections of options; some of which can be
toggled on or off. On these screens, use the Tab key to move from section to
section. For options that you can toggle on and off, highlight the option using the
arrow keys and then use the space bar to toggle the option on or off, as desired.

Image for DOS also makes wide use of accelerator keys. An accelerator key is an
individual letter that you can press (or press in combination with the Alt key) to
select an option or a menu item. In Image for DOS, accelerator keys appear in
yellow or are underlined.

How you use an accelerator key depends on the current location of the cursor; if it
is in the same section of the screen as the desired accelerator key, simply press the
applicable accelerator letter. If the cursor is in any other section, press and hold the
Alt key, and then press the applicable accelerator letter. For example, when the
Backup Options screen first appears in the console version of Image for DOS, the
cursor is in the Options section. If you want to enter a description, press and hold
the Alt key and then press the d key. Pressing just the d key would not work in this
case, because of the initial position of the cursor. However, when you press Alt+d,
the cursor jumps to and selects the text box in the Description section.

You can use the Esc key or click Back to move back to the previous menu. If you
use Esc/Back in this manner, Image for DOS remembers the selections you have
already made throughout the Image for DOS session, in the event that you return to
the same screen.

When using the GUI version of Image for DOS you can also use the mouse to
select controls, toggle options, click buttons, etc.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 27 of 218


Creating Backups with Image for DOS
Create the Image for DOS boot media using any of the techniques described in the
section “Installing Image for DOS” or “Installing Image for DOS Manually.” Insert
the boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port, and boot your computer.

To boot from a CD/DVD or UFD, you may need to change the order in which your
computer selects boot devices. As your computer begins to boot, you should see a
message—before you ever get to Windows—that tells you what key to press to
enter Setup—typically the Delete key, F2, or F12. Once in the BIOS, you need to
follow the instructions provided in your BIOS to reorder the boot sequence to permit
your CD/DVD drive or UFD to be examined before your hard drive. If your system
starts by offering you the option to select a boot menu, you can use the boot menu
to identify the device you want to use to boot.

When you create a backup, you can create either a full backup, a differential
backup, or an incremental backup. A full backup is exactly what it sounds like—
Image for DOS backs up your entire hard disk. Differential and incremental backups
works in conjunction with a full backup—you create a full backup the first time and
then create differential or incremental backups, which contain only changes, for
subsequent backups. A differential backup will, initially, be smaller than a full
backup but, as you make changes on your hard drive, the size of the differential
backup will grow over time. And, because Image for DOS is a sector-based backup,
the smaller file size may not be as small as you expect. An incremental backup will
contain only the changes since the last full or incremental backup.

Before you make the decision concerning the type of backup you want to create,
read Appendix B: Backup Strategies for a detailed explanation of full, differential,
and incremental backups.

Things to Consider Before Backing Up


There are very few rules to follow when formulating a backup plan.
Please consider the following ideas to help you create a backup
that will help you easily recover from a disaster. For more
information on backup strategies, see Appendix B: Backup
Strategies on Page 193.

Consider the destination for your backup. For example, if you


will be backing up around 30 GB of data, you probably will not
want to store the backup on a set of CD-R/RW discs, since the
backup will likely require 20 discs or more (based on an expected
compression ratio of 40-60%). Better options in this case would
be:

* Back up directly to a set of DVD/BD discs.

* Backup to an alternate hard drive partition (and perhaps


use the free add-on utility BINGBURN later to burn the
backup to a set of DVD/BD discs).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 28 of 218


* Backup to an external hard drive (recommended).

Plan your backup with a restore strategy in mind. You can:

* Save the backup directly to a set of bootable CD, DVD, or


BD discs, as explained in this manual. To restore, simply
boot with the restore disc, and use Image for DOS to
perform the restore.

* Save the backup to an alternate hard drive partition. To


restore, run Image for DOS from a bootable USB flash
drive, CD/DVD disc, or a floppy disk.

* Save the backup to an external hard drive (recommended).


To restore, run Image for DOS from a bootable USB flash
drive, CD/DVD disc, or a floppy disk.

Strike your own balance between convenience and resiliency.


Consider these simple ideas:

* Save your backups directly to an alternate hard drive


partition and use the free utility BINGBURN to burn a
second copy of the backup to a set of CD/DVD/BD discs.
Then, if you need to restore, you can quickly and
conveniently use the backup stored on the hard drive. But,
if things really go wrong and the primary copy of the
backup is not available, you can fall back on the copy of
the backup that you saved on CD/DVD/BD discs.

* Don’t get rid of an existing set of backup discs when you


create a new set. Instead, keep two or more sets of backup
discs. That way, you can fall back to an older backup if
something should go wrong with the newest backup.

* If you are using multiple sets of backup CD/DVD/BD discs,


keep the newest set offsite to guard against physical
damage.

* Use multiple external hard drives and rotate between them.


Keep at least one drive offsite.

Creating a Full Backup


You proceed through a series of menus to create a full backup. Insert your Image
for DOS boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port and boot your computer.
Then, follow these steps:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 29 of 218


1. On the Image for DOS Main Menu/Select Operation screen, select Backup.

Image for DOS (GUI)

Image for DOS

Image for DOS User Manual Page 30 of 218


2. On the Backup/Select screen that appears, select Full Backup.

3. On the Backup From/Select Drive Interface screen that appears, select one
of the following options; these options refer to how Image for DOS should
attempt to access the drive that contains the partition you want to back up:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor. To get the most out of this option when creating an image, you
should select File (Direct)—rather than File (OS)—when selecting the File
Access Method of the target for saving the image. (This advice applies to
step 7 below.)

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 31 of 218


* Virtual Drive – Enables you to select a virtual drive to back up. If the virtual
drive you want to back up doesn’t appear in the Select File Drive list, you
can press F2 (console version) or click the Add Virtual Drive button (GUI
version) and navigate to it to add it to the list.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 32 of 218


4. On the Backup From/Select Source Drive screen that appears, select the
hard drive that you want to back up or the hard drive that contains the partition
you want to backup.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 33 of 218


5. From the Backup From/Select Item to Backup from HD screen that
appears, select the drive or partition(s) you wish to back up. If you choose to
back up a single partition, skip to Step 7.

Selecting a Drive or a Partition


To back up an entire drive, check the box beside Drive.
Remember, you can back up only one drive at a time. If you want
to back up a partition, check the box beside that partition. When
restoring an image of a partition, you might need to use the
Update BOOT.INI, Set Active, and Write Standard MBR Code (or
Restore First Track) options described in the section, “Image for
DOS Restore Options.”

If you individually select all partitions on a drive, Image for DOS


handles the backup as individual partition backups, not as a full
drive backup. You can restore an entire drive in one restore
operation using individual partitions, but you can’t set sizing or
rescaling options or restore to a different location (sector /LBA).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 34 of 218


When a partition is highlighted, the following options are available:

Delete – Press the Del key or click Delete to delete the selected partition. You will
be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Details/Information – Press F1 or click Information to view the details of the


partition (used space, free space, size needed to restore, etc.).

Compact – Press F3 or click Compact to compact the partition’s file system.


FAT/FAT32 and NTFS file systems are supported. This option allows you to
reduce the size required for a restore. You will be prompted to confirm the
compaction and then asked for the compaction value (size in MiB).

For example, if you have a 250GB partition that contains 50GB of data and
requires 150GB of space to restore and you need to restore it to a 100GB
partition, you can compact the file system to under 100GB before imaging it
and then restore it to the 100GB partition.

6. On the Backup/Select screen that appears if you chose to back up a drive or


multiple partitions in Step 5, choose one of the following options:

* Single File Set – Select this option to create a backup that is comprised of
a single image, regardless of how many individual partitions you are backing
up. The first file created for the image set will be named <name>.TBI,
where <name> is a character string you supply. If Image for DOS creates
additional files, Image for DOS will name them <name>.1, <name>.2,
<name>.3, and so on. The number of files Image for DOS will create
depends on the overall size of the backup and the File Size setting you
choose when you set the options for the backup in a later step.

* Multiple File Set – Select this option to create a backup that is comprised of
one image for every individual partition that Image for DOS backs up. Image
for DOS names the first file created for the first image set <name>_0.TBI,
where <name> is a character string you supply. Image for DOS adds _0 to
identify the image file set. If Image for DOS creates additional files for the
same image set, they will be named <name>_0.1, <name>_0.2,
<name>_0.3, and so on. Image for DOS names the files of the second
image set (i.e. the second partition included in the backup) <name>_1.TBI,
<name>_1.1, <name>_1.2, <name>_1.3, and so on. Image for DOS will
name subsequent image sets accordingly with _2, _3, and so on, appended
to the file name.

* If you choose this option, each file Image for DOS creates represents
only a single partition and you won’t be able to completely restore a
drive with one menu option but will have to restore each partition
separately.

* The number of files Image for DOS will create for each image set
depends on the size of the corresponding partition and the File Size
setting you choose in a later step.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 35 of 218


7. On the Backup To/Select File Access Method screen that appears, select
one of the following options, which refer to the location where Image for DOS
should save the backup:

* File (OS) – This option appears only if you boot using a DOS boot disk that
you created using any method other than the MakeDisk utility and does not
appear in the figure below. Choose this option to use the operating system
file services to save the image files. You must use this option when saving
images to a mapped network drive.

* File (Direct) – This option allows you to save the image file(s) to a folder on
a hard drive that does not have a drive letter assigned to it by DOS.

Note: Do not save your image to the same partition you are backing up.

* File (CD/DVD) – This option allows you to save the backup file(s) to a CD,
DVD, or BD disc. The first disc created will automatically be made bootable
by Image for DOS.

Note: Image for DOS can automatically overwrite CD-RW, DVD+RW, and BD-RE
media. If you wish to use DVD-RW media, Image for DOS can format it, but the
process takes 1 hour per disc, so you may prefer to use fully formatted, fully
blanked, or brand new discs. To fully blank the DVD-RW media, use your burning
software’s “full erase” function. (The “quick erase” function will not work for this
purpose.)

Image for DOS User Manual Page 36 of 218


8. On the Backup To/Select Drive Interface screen that appears, select one of
the following options. These options refer to how Image for DOS should
attempt to access the hard drive or CD/DVD/BD drive where your image will be
saved:

If you chose File (Direct) in Step 7, you can choose one of the following
options:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor. To get the most out of this option when creating an image, you
should select File (Direct)—rather than File (OS)—when selecting the File
Access Method of the target for saving the image.

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 37 of 218


* Virtual Drive – Enables you to select a single file virtual drive on which to
store a backup. If the virtual drive containing the image doesn’t appear in
the Select File Drive list, you can press F2 (console version) or click the Add
Virtual Drive button (GUI version) and navigate to it to add it to the list. If you
haven’t yet created a virtual drive using VirtualPC, VMWare, or Hyper-V,
you can type a name in the open window that appears and press Enter or
use the drive letters listed to browse for virtual drives on which to store your
backup. If you type a name of a virtual drive that doesn’t exist, Image for
DOS prompts you to create it. When you create a virtual drive, you can
specify its size and type. You can specify the size in bytes by including no
letters. Or, you can specify the size in Mebibytes by supplying an M or in
Gibibytes by supplying a G.

Note that a new virtual drive must be partitioned and formatted before you
can use it. However, you can restore an image or copy a partition into a new
virtual drive without needing to partition or format it first.

You can create any of the following types of virtual drives:

* RAW - Fixed Size – Creates a plain (raw) file as the virtual drive. Its size
is fixed and allocated with zeros on creation.2

* VHD - Dynamic Expanding – Creates a VirtualPC Dynamic Expanding


virtual hard drive.1

* VHD - Fixed Size – Creates a VirtualPC Fixed Size virtual hard drive.2

* VHDX - Dynamic Expanding – Creates a Hyper-V Dynamic Expanding


virtual hard drive.1,3

* VHDX - Fixed Size – Creates a Hyper-V Fixed Size virtual hard drive.2,3

* VHDX - Dynamic 4KiB Sector Size – Creates a Hyper-V Dynamic


Expanding virtual hard drive with a sector size of 4KiB (4096 bytes).1,3

* VHDX - Fixed Size 4KiB Sector Size – Creates a Hyper-V Fixed Size
virtual hard drive with a sector size of 4KiB (4096 bytes).2,3

* VMDK - Monolithic Sparse (IDE) – Creates a VMWare Sparse IDE


virtual hard drive.1

* VMDK - Monolithic Sparse (SCSI) – Creates a VMWare Sparse SCSI


virtual hard drive.1
1
Dynamic expanding virtual drives append data to the file as you add data to the
virtual drive. The file size starts small and grows as needed.
2
Fixed size virtual drives allocate data for the file when it’s created and the file size
does not change. The file size will be the same as the virtual drive size (e.g. a
40GiB virtual drive will use 40GiB of space).
3
For Windows caching reasons, it is highly recommended to create partitions
within a VHDX file that are aligned on at least a 1MiB boundary. That is either

Image for DOS User Manual Page 38 of 218


2048 sectors for 512 byte sized sectors or 256 sectors for 4096 byte sized
sectors.

If you chose File (CD/DVD) in Step 7, you can choose one of the following
options:

* ATAPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is an ATAPI device,


and none of the other selections apply. This is the most common option.

* ASPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive will be accessed using
an ASPI layer. (You must supply the ASPI driver for this option to work.)

* USB2 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to a USB 2


controller.

* IEEE1394 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to an


IEEE 1394 controller.

If your USB device does not appear at first, please try pressing the Esc key,
waiting a few seconds, and selecting the USB or USB2 option again.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 39 of 218


9. Either the Backup To/Select File Drive shown in the figure below or the
Backup To/Select Target Drive screen appears, depending on whether you
are saving the backup to CD/DVD/BD discs or to a hard drive. Select the target
CD/DVD drive or hard drive. If you select a hard drive, the Backup To/Select
File Location on HD screen appears. You can select a partition on the hard
drive if it contains partitions; otherwise, press Enter.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 40 of 218


10. On the screen that appears, type a name for the image file you want to create.
Image for DOS suggests a filename that includes identifying information. For
example, in the default name shown in the screen below, “d” stands for the
Direct method (refer to Step 3), “0” represents the drive being backed up, and
“$~YYYY$-$~MM$-$~DD$-$~HHMM$” represent the date (in 4-digit year, 2-
digit month, and 2-digit day format) and time (in 2-digit hour and minute format)
the backup started. If you opt to back up a partition instead of an entire drive,
the partition ID follows the drive number. If you use the BIOS (Direct) method
(refer to Step 3), Image for DOS replaces “d” with “b.”

You do not have to supply a file extension—just the path and file name itself;
Image for DOS will automatically add the .TBI extension. If you selected File
(OS), you must follow DOS naming conventions and use a file name that does
not exceed eight characters.

Note: To access drives using UNC paths, first map the drive using the “net use
x: \\server\share” command. Then, simply specify the path as usual (e.g.
“x:\folder\file”, where “x:” is the mapped drive).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 41 of 218


11. On the Backup Options screen that appears, select the options you want to
use. See the section, “Understanding Backup Options” on Page 47 for an
explanation of each option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 42 of 218


12. Select Next to display the Summary screen, which summarizes the
parameters of your backup.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to start a backup with the options
you selected in Image for DOS. When using IFD GUI, you can save the
command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image for DOS by
clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking OK. The command line
can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS)
file. To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command
option (above).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 43 of 218


13. When you select Start, the backup process begins, and a progress bar
appears on-screen. You can interrupt the backup and validation operations at
any time by pressing the F12 key or clicking Exit. Image for DOS will ask you
to confirm that you want to cancel before it interrupts the current operation.
When Image for DOS finishes, this message appears.

Note: If a message appears stating that the discs created will not be bootable
because the CDBOOT.INS file was not found or it contained invalid references,
please refer to the section, “Customizing CDBOOT.F35” for information on
setting up CDBOOT.INS.

After you press Enter, the main menu for Image for DOS reappears. Select Exit
and, when prompted, remove the Image for DOS boot media and press Enter to
reboot your computer.

Setting Image for DOS Program Options


Program options can be configured by clicking the Settings button (IFD GUI) or
selecting Global Settings (IFD CUI). Most of these options are also available when
creating the boot media using the MakeDisk utility. Additionally, these settings are
really one-time settings – review them and make changes only if necessary. Once
you establish a set of options that works for you, you don’t need to make changes
each time you run Image for DOS.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 44 of 218


Geometry Settings:

Disable - Check this box to disable the global geometry settings and revert to using
program defaults or drive specific overrides equivalent to versions prior to version
2.52.

Align MBR for BIOS Auto Mode - This option is enabled by default to prevent
problems with unaligned partitions on systems with their BIOS using Auto Mode.
Many newer systems use auto mode by default, and some even don't have an
option to turn it off. This is equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align
MBR Ending HS and Align MBR HS when Truncated.

Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries – This option provides a convenient way to


enable 1MiB partition alignment for all drives (drives with 512 byte sectors will be
aligned on 2048 sectors; drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256
sectors). This is popular with users of SSD type drives. It is the equivalent to
enabling the individual overrides Align on 1MiB Boundaries, Align MBR Ending HS,
Align MBR HS when Truncated, and disabling Align on End.

Assume Same Target System – Enable this option to prevent problems where
users restore an image from another system to a drive that will be put back in the
other system. For example, the hard drive from PC-A is backed up; PC-B is used
to restore to a new hard; that new drive is placed back in PC-A. Without this option
enabled, Image for DOS would setup the partition to properly boot on the hard drive
for PC-B which can sometimes (not always) be a problem when the hard drive is

Image for DOS User Manual Page 45 of 218


going back to PC-A. This option solves that and is equivalent to the individual Use
MBR Geometry override.

Use Source Host Geometry - This option is the global equivalent to the individual
Use Original Geometry override.

Validate Geometry Before Use - This option is enabled by default and used to
ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is aligned to known
standards before accepting it for use. It only applies when Assume Same Target
System is enabled.

Misc. Settings:

Simple Operations – Enable this option to have Image for DOS automatically
handle most options for you. You simply choose which physical drive you want to
back up and, if needed, which drive you want to save to – the target storage area is
automatically maintained and files are deleted as needed when it runs out of free
space. Backup, Restore, Validate, and Copy are available in Simple Operations
mode.

Use New Windows MBR – Windows Vista and later tied the kernel loader to the
MBR code such that using previous MBR code may not allow Windows Vista or
later to boot on certain machines. Leave this option enabled (the default) to have
Image for DOS use the code base compatible with Windows Vista or later. The
new MBR code will continue to boot older OSes with the exception of some (rare)
configurations using Win9x on FAT32.

Automatic Scaling Restrictions – When enabled (default), small partitions will not
be scaled and will be restored at their original sizes. Unselect to have Image for
DOS scale small partitions when restoring a full drive image..

Automatic Boot Partition Updates – When enabled, Image for DOS will
automatically update the boot partition when restoring a full drive image.

Automatic Restore Drive Search – Select to enable Image for DOS to search for
the destination drive using the disk signature or GUID when performing an
automatic restore (USB, 1394, and virtual drives will not be searched). If a match
isn’t found or if this option is not enabled, the drive number of the backed up drive
will be used.

Retain Failed Backups – If you enable this option and a backup operation fails,
Image for DOS won’t delete the files from the failed backup.

Completion Alarm – Select to enable an audible alarm upon completion of an


operation, errors, or when user interaction is required (insert media, etc.).

Output Disk ID to Command Line – Select to enable command line output and
relevant log entries to use the Disk ID (NT Signature or GUID) instead of drive
numbers where the drive has an ID and the ID is unique. Specifying the Disk ID
instead of the drive number may be more stable (especially for setup of scheduling
backups) in situations where the drives may be reordered at boot.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 46 of 218


Resize with Caching – Enable this option to reduce the time required to resize a
partition by using a cache.

Prefer Target Disk ID on Change – When enabled the Change Disk ID and
GUIDs option will attempt to use the existing target drive ID/GUID instead of
generating a random ID. This is useful when scheduling drive copy operations that
use the /csig option and use the disk ID to identify the drive instead of the drive
number.

Use Directory Data in Metadata Hash – Enable this option to have Image for DOS
look at the full contents of directories to calculate the metadata hash. This can
prevent validate byte-for-byte errors due to normal and safe changes in the
directory area, but requires more processing gathering information. When creating
the metadata hash it will be built in the mode indicated by this option. If you use a
hash file created in a different mode than the current setting, all directories are
considered changed (will be backed up or restored).

Allow file deletion on Restore & Validate file list – Enabling this option allows
you to delete the files that are listed when selecting Restore or Validate for Simple
Operations mode. This option is off by default because the program handles the
lifetime of the files automatically and users should not be interfering with that
process (as well as not typically wanting to delete anything during a restore or
validate operation). However, there are times when deleting files may be necessary
such as when you get a new computer or removed a drive that will no longer be
used. For example, if you replace your computer, the new backups will be created
in a folder that is different than the original computer and the old backups will
remain. When that happens, you may not have enough space to create many, or
any, new backups. In order to free up storage space you will need to delete some of
the old backups.
Important: Be careful you don't delete backup files that have data you need and pay
attention to the files that will be deleted in the list that will be presented to you. If
you delete a backup file that has other files depending on it, such as incremental
backups, not only will the file you selected be deleted but also all the files that
depend on it.

Understanding Backup Options


The options you can set when backing up in Image for DOS are listed below. Most
options are available whether you are backing up a partition or an entire drive
(differences are noted).

Validate – If you select this option, Image for DOS will perform internal consistency
checks on the backup file(s) after creating them. Enabling this option increases the
overall processing time, but can help ensure that the backup is reliable.

Validate Byte-for-Byte – If you select this option, Image for DOS will verify that
every byte in the source data was backed up correctly, ensuring 100% accuracy.
This option generally doubles the processing time of the overall backup operation,
but is advisable to use where maximum reliability is required. You can (but do not
need to) select the Validate option if you select the Validate Byte-for-Byte option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 47 of 218


Encrypt Data – If you select this option, Image for DOS will encrypt the backup
file(s) with 256-bit AES encryption prior to saving them to the target medium. If you
select the Encrypt Data option, you must also supply a password in the Password
text boxes. Enter the password in the first Password text box and retype it in the
second Password text box for verification.

Note: If you create a backup with the Encrypt Data option, you will need to
supply the password whenever you wish to validate the backup, restore it, or
open it in TBIView or TBIMount. If you lose and/or forget the password, you won’t
be able to open or restore from the backup. TeraByte Unlimited has no way of
recovering data from an encrypted backup with an unknown password.

If you do not enable the Encrypt Data setting, Image for DOS will use the
Password text boxes to password-protect the image file without any encryption.

The maximum password length is 128 characters. Passwords are case sensitive
and may contain upper-case letters, lower-case letters, numbers, special
characters, spaces, and non-ASCII characters.

Omit Page File Data – If you select this option, the contents of page files
(pagefile.sys, swapfile.sys) that reside in the root directory of the source
partition will not be backed up and will not take up space in the backup image. If the
page files reside anywhere else on the source partition other than the root directory,
Image for DOS will back them up, regardless of this setting.

Omit Hibernation Data – If you select this option, the contents of the hibernation
file (hiberfil.sys) that resides in the root directory of the source partition will
not be backed up and will not take up space in the backup image. If
hiberfil.sys resides anywhere else on the source partition other than the root
directory, Image for DOS will back it up, regardless of this setting.

Omit $UsnJrnl Data – Selecting this option will omit the NTFS $UsnJrnl data from
the backup.

Ignore IO Errors – This option only affects how Image for DOS handles bad
sectors on the source drive, and it applies to both the back up phase and the
validation phase of the backup operation. Normally, if Image for DOS encounters a
bad sector on a source partition during a backup operation, it will notify you
concerning the read error and give you the option to continue or abort. If you select
this option, Image for DOS will ignore the error and continue. Generally, you should
select this option only if you need to back up a source partition on a drive you know
contains bad sectors. On some systems, if you select this setting and Image for
DOS encounters bad sectors, there will be a significant delay as the internal
retry/recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector(s). In addition,
some systems may hang if the BIOS option is used to access the source drive. In
such cases, try using the BIOS (Direct) option instead.

Ignore Validate B4B Errors – Prevent byte-for-byte validation failures from being
considered an error. The backup operation will continue instead of aborting (errors
will still be logged). This is only useful for conditions where it's known that system
memory, devices, cables are reliable.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 48 of 218


Disable Auto Eject – This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically
opening the optical drive tray. If you don’t select this option, Image for DOS will
open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the backup
operation.

Reboot When Completed – Use this option to automatically reboot your computer
after the backup finishes.

Shutdown When Completed – Use this option to automatically shut down your
computer after the backup finishes.

Log Results to File – Select this option to make Image for DOS log the details of
the backup operation. Image for DOS saves the log as IFD.LOG in the IMAGE.EXE
program directory. To be able to save IFD.LOG, Image for DOS must be running
from a writable medium such as a non-write-protected floppy diskette. You can use
the /logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFD.LOG.

Faster Changes Only Backups – Select this option to have Image for DOS create
a hash file to speed up creating a Changes Only (differential or incremental)
backup. This option is only available when creating an image that is not being
saved to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). By default, this option is also ignored if the
Backwards Compatible option is enabled. The hash file will be limited to the max file
size and have the same file name as the backup with an extension starting at .#0
followed by .#1, .#2, etc. as needed. The actual speed increase realized when
creating an image will vary depending on the system. If the hash file is deleted the
backup will proceed as normal without it. To create a hash for an existing full image
use the /hash operation command line parameter.

Note: This option will also create a special-use file with the .#_# extension. When
using the command line, this file can be used in place of the .TBI base image,
which may be located elsewhere (e.g. ftp, offsite), along with the hash file to create
a changes-only backup.

Use Metadata Hash Files – Select this option to have Image for DOS create a
hash file from the file system metadata to speed up creating a Changes Only
(differential or incremental) backup. This option is only supported for NTFS
partitions and relies on file system metadata to determine what gets backed up.
Using this option in conjunction with Faster Changes Only Backups can greatly
decrease the time required to create the backup. This option is not supported when
creating an image that is being saved to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). By default, this
option is also ignored if the Backwards Compatible option is enabled. The hash file
will be limited to the max file size and have the same file name as the backup with
an extension starting at .@0 followed by .@1, .@2, etc. as needed. If the hash file
is deleted the backup will proceed as normal without it.

NOTE: You should only use this option if you understand its impact on backup and
restore operations.

Backup Unused Sectors – By default, if the file system(s) you are backing up are
one of the recognized types (i.e. FAT, FAT32, NTFS, Ext2/3/4, ReiserFS, XFS, or

Image for DOS User Manual Page 49 of 218


HSF+), Image for DOS will back up only used sectors. If you select this option,
Image for DOS will include all used and unused sectors in the backup. This option
has no effect on partitions that do not contain a recognized file system; such
partitions will always be backed up in full, regardless of this setting.

NOTE: This option causes Image for DOS to ignore the Omit Page File Data and
Omit Hibernation Data options.

For entire drive backups this option causes a raw sector by sector backup (and later
restore) of the entire drive without regard to any partitions or adjustments.

This option is not available when creating a differential or incremental backup.


Instead, the new backup will use the setting as specified when the base image was
created.

Delete Hash Files Used – This option appears when you make a differential or
incremental backup (Backup, Change Only). Select this option to have Image for
DOS delete the hash files used to create the backup (older unused hash files in the
chain won’t be deleted).

Backwards Compatible – Current versions of Image for DOS may use a TBI
format that is not compatible with prior versions. Select this option to have Image
for DOS create the TBI file using a format that is compatible with version 2.50. If
desired, use the BackwardsCompatibleLevel INI file option to specify a more
current file version. Note that this option will not be available if the backup requires
a newer version to support it.

Validate Disk – If you store your backup on disc media (CD/DVD/BD), you can also
choose to validate each disc to ensure that no media errors occur while Image for
DOS stores the backup on each disc. If Image for DOS detects an error, it prompts
you to replace the failed disc at the time the error is detected. If you don’t enable
this option, Image for DOS notifies you of errors only after the backup process is
complete.

Limit Disk Usage – This option only applies when saving images to disc media
(CD/DVD/BD). If enabled, this option instructs Image for DOS to leave the last 10%
of each disc unused to help prevent data errors that are more common near the
edges of discs.

Compression – Select Standard or one of the Enhanced options to compress the


backup files that Image for DOS creates. With compression, Image for DOS
typically produces smaller image files but takes longer to back up. If you select
None, Image for DOS creates your backup more quickly but produces larger image
file(s). The attainable compression ratio depends on a number of factors, including
the number, size, and content of the files on the source partition and the level of file
fragmentation on the source partition. Typically, Image for DOS compresses
backup files 40% - 60%. However, if the source partition primarily contains files that
do not compress well, such as media files like MP3, JPG, and AVI, or archive files
like 7Z, RAR, and ZIP, the compression ratio will be much lower.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 50 of 218


The Enhanced Size - A/B/C options provide greater compression, but the backups
may take considerably longer. The Enhanced Size - D/E/F options are faster than
their A/B/C counterparts, but offer slightly less compression. The Enhanced Speed
- A/B options offer decent compression with the emphasis on back up speed over
backup file size.

File Size – If you are saving the image to a hard disk, you may select this option to
choose the maximum size of the image files created by Image for DOS. The
available options are:

* Max – Automatically creates the largest file(s) allowed by the file system in use
on the target medium. For example, the largest files that may reside on FAT,
FAT32, and NTFS partitions are 2 GiB, 4 GiB, and (just under) 16 TiB,
respectively.

* 7.95 GiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to standard dual-layer
DVD disc(s).

* 4.37 GiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to standard single-layer
DVD disc(s).

* 4 GiB – Useful for FAT32 compatibility.

* 2 GiB – Useful for FAT compatibility.

* 698 MiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to 700-MiB CD disc(s).

* 648 MiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to 650-MiB CD disc(s).

* You can also type in the desired value in bytes, Kibibytes (KiB), Mebibytes
(MiB), or Gibibytes (GiB). Decimal values are supported (e.g. 2.5GiB).

Write Speed – This option appears in place of the File Size option if you chose to
save your image to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). We recommend that you use the
default setting for this option, which is “Optimal,” unless you encounter problems.

Description – You can use this text box to assign descriptive text to individual
backups. The description you enter will be visible in the file list that appears when
you are preparing to restore or validate a backup. You view the description by
selecting the backup and pressing F1 or clicking the Information button.

Save Defaults (IFD GUI) or F4 (IFD) – Click/press to save the settings you
establish. In the future, Image for DOS will display these settings automatically.
Note that the settings will not be saved if IFD is unable to write to the IFD.INI (or
BOOTITBM.INI) file.

Creating a Differential or Incremental Backup


When you create a differential backup, Image for DOS compares the condition of
the source partition or hard drive to a full backup you identify to determine what

Image for DOS User Manual Page 51 of 218


changes have occurred on the source partition or hard drive since you created the
full backup.

When you create an incremental backup, Image for DOS compares the condition of
the source partition or hard drive to the incremental backup (or full backup, if no
incrementals) you identify to determine what changes have occurred on the source
partition or hard drive since you created the specified incremental backup.

Note: When creating incremental backups remember to limit the chain length to a
reasonable number. Each backup in the chain requires additional resources to
process and adds another potential point of failure. It is not recommended to go
over 30 and a lower number is preferred.

Both differential and incremental backups contain only the changed sectors. For
details on differential and incremental backups, see Appendix B: Backup Strategies
on Page 193.

The process for creating a differential or incremental backup is very similar to the
process for creating a full backup, and you set many of the same options during
both processes. When you analyze the steps you take, you’ll notice the following
differences:

* When you create a full backup, you identify the source drive you want to back
up.

* When you create a differential backup, you identify the full backup Image for
DOS should reference when creating the differential backup.

* When you create an incremental backup, you identify the incremental backup
(or full backup, if no incrementals) Image for DOS should reference when
creating the new incremental backup.

Tip: It’s always a good idea to validate your backup as you create it.

Insert your Image for DOS boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port and
boot your computer. On the Image for DOS Main Menu, select Backup. Then,
follow these steps:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 52 of 218


1. On the Backup screen that appears, select Changes Only.

2. On the Backup/Select screen that appears, select an option to determine how


Image for DOS detects changes and performs the differential/incremental
backup:

* If you choose Single Pass, Image for DOS identifies the changes you have
made to the source partition since you created the existing backup and then
backs up those changes, all in one pass. You cannot use this option if the
associated existing backup spans multiple CD/DVD/BD discs.

* If you choose Multi Pass, Image for DOS compares the source partition
against the existing backup in one pass and then makes the
differential/incremental backup in a second pass. You must use this option if
the associated existing backup spans multiple CD/DVD/BD discs.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 53 of 218


3. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/Select File Access Method
screen that appears, choose File (OS), File (Direct) or File (CD/DVD) to
identify the location of the existing backup related to this
differential/incremental backup.

Note: The File (OS) option appears only if you boot using a DOS boot disk that
you created using any method other than the MakeDisk utility. Choose this option
to use the operating system file services to save the image files. You must use
this option when saving images to a mapped network drive.

4. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/Select Drive Interface screen


that appears, select one of the following options. These options refer to how
Image for DOS should attempt to access the hard drive or CD/DVD/BD drive
where the existing backup is stored:

If you chose File (Direct) in Step 3, you can choose one of the following
options:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor. To get the most out of this option when creating an image, you

Image for DOS User Manual Page 54 of 218


should select File (direct)—rather than File (OS)—as the File Access
Method of target for saving the image.

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

* Virtual Drive – Use this option to select a virtual drive containing a backup
image. If the virtual drive containing the image doesn’t appear in the Select
File Drive list, you can click the “Add Virtual Drive” button or press F2 and
navigate to it to add it to the list.

If you chose File (CD/DVD) in Step 3, you can choose one of the following
options:

* ATAPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is an ATAPI device and
none of the other selections apply. This is the most commonly selected
option.

* ASPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive will be accessed using
an ASPI layer. (You must supply the ASPI driver for this option to work.)

* USB2 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to a USB 2


controller.

* IEEE1394 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to an


IEEE 1394 controller.

If your USB device does not appear at first, please try pressing the Esc key,
waiting a few seconds, and selecting the USB or USB2 option again.

5. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/Select File Drive screen that
appears, select the drive that contains the existing backup.

* If the existing backup resides on CD/DVD/BD discs, insert the first disc in
the set and then select the corresponding optical drive from the list.

* If the existing backup resides on a hard drive or a virtual drive, select the
applicable drive from the list shown and then select the correct partition.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 55 of 218


6. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/File Selection screen that
appears, select the .TBI file that corresponds to the desired existing backup.
You can type the name of the .TBI file (you don’t need to type the .TBI file
extension) or you can press Tab and then use the arrow keys to highlight the
file and press Enter to select it. If the .TBI file resides inside a folder, highlight
the folder and press Enter to display the contents of the folder.

If you open a folder and want to navigate back to the parent folder, select the ..
list item and press Enter.

If you select a file that you created using the encryption or the password-
protect option, supply the correct password to continue.

Image for DOS will prompt for the locations of any backups in the selected
chain if it’s unable to locate them in the folder of the existing backup.

7. On the Backup To/Select File Access Method screen that appears, choose
File (OS), File (Direct) or File (CD/DVD) to identify the location where you
want to save the differential/incremental backup files.

Note: You do not need to store files from a differential or incremental backup in
the same location where you store full backup files. When you restore a
differential or incremental backup, Image for DOS will prompt you for the
locations of the full, differential, and incremental backup files.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 56 of 218


8. The appearance of the screen that Image for DOS displays next depends on
the choice you selected in Step 7. See Step 4 for a description of your choices.

9. On the Backup To/Select File Drive screen or the Backup To/Select Target
Drive screen that appears, select the target drive where you want to store the
differential/incremental backup. If appropriate, select the partition on which to
store the backup.

10. On the Backup To/File Name screen that appears, supply a name for the
differential/incremental backup file(s). Image for DOS suggests a filename that
includes identifying information. For example, in the default name shown in the
screen below, “d” stands for the Direct method (refer to Step 4), “0” represents
the drive being backed up, “chg” indicates that this backup will store changes
made since the full backup, and “$~YYYY$-$~MM$-$~DD$-$~HHMM$”
represent the date (in 4-digit year, 2-digit month, and 2-digit day format) and
time (in 2-digit hour and minute format) the backup started. If you opt to back
up a partition instead of an entire drive, the partition ID follows the drive
number. If you use the BIOS (Direct) method (refer to Step 4), Image for DOS
replaces “d” with “b.”

You do not have to supply a file extension—just the path and file name itself—
Image for DOS will add the extension automatically. If you are using the File
(OS) option, you must follow DOS naming conventions and use a file name
that does not exceed eight characters.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 57 of 218


11. On the Backup Options screen that appears, select the options you want to
use. See the section, “Understanding Backup Options” on Page 47 for an
explanation of each option.

12. Select Next to display the Summary screen, which summarizes the
parameters of your backup.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to start a backup with the options
you selected in Image for DOS. When using IFD GUI, you can save the
command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image for DOS by
clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking OK. The command line
can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS)
file. To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command
option (above).

13. When you select Start, the backup process begins, and a progress bar
appears on-screen. When Image for DOS finishes, a message appears to let
you know that the backup was successful. You can interrupt the backup and
validation operations at any time by pressing the F12 key or clicking Exit.
Image for DOS will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it
interrupts the current operation.

Note: If a message appears stating that the discs created will not be bootable
because the CDBOOT.INS file was not found or it contained invalid references
appears, please refer to the section, “Customizing CDBOOT.F35” for information
on setting up CDBOOT.INS.

After you press Enter to dismiss the message, the main menu for Image for DOS
reappears. Select Exit and, when prompted, remove the Image for DOS boot media
and press Enter to reboot your computer.

Consolidating a Backup Chain


Use the Consolidate backup operation to combine differential or incremental
images of a backup chain into a single image file. The newly created image is a full
image and can be used as the base image for future differential or incremental
backups.

In the following example, a full backup has been created followed by five
incremental backups:

E:\Backups\Win10 Full.tbi E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 1.tbi


E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 2.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 3.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 4.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 5.tbi

Image for DOS User Manual Page 58 of 218


Consolidating Win10 Inc 5.tbi will combine all five incremental backups and the
base full into a new backup image. Restoring the new backup image would be the
same as restoring Win10 Inc 5.tbi.

To consolidate a backup chain:

Insert your Image for DOS boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port and
boot your computer. On the Image for DOS Main Menu, select Backup, then follow
these steps:

1. On the Backup screen that appears, select Consolidate.

2. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/Select File Access Method


screen that appears, choose File (OS), File (Direct) or File (CD/DVD) to
identify the location of the existing differential or incremental backup you wish
to consolidate.

Note: The File (OS) option appears only if you boot using a DOS boot disk that
you created using any method other than the MakeDisk utility. Choose this option
to use the operating system file services to save the image files. You must use
this option when saving images to a mapped network drive.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 59 of 218


3. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/Select Drive Interface screen
that appears, select one of the following options. These options refer to how
Image for DOS should attempt to access the hard drive or CD/DVD/BD drive
where the existing backup is stored:

If you chose File (Direct) in Step 2, you can choose one of the following
options:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor. To get the most out of this option when creating an image, you
should select File (direct)—rather than File (OS)—as the File Access
Method of target for saving the image.

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

* Virtual Drive – Use this option to select a virtual drive containing a backup
image. If the virtual drive containing the image doesn’t appear in the Select
File Drive list, you can click the “Add Virtual Drive” button or press F2 and
navigate to it to add it to the list.

If you chose File (CD/DVD) in Step 3, you can choose one of the following
options:

* ATAPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is an ATAPI device and
none of the other selections apply. This is the most commonly selected
option.

* ASPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive will be accessed using
an ASPI layer. (You must supply the ASPI driver for this option to work.)

* USB2 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to a USB 2


controller.

* IEEE1394 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to an


IEEE 1394 controller.

If your USB device does not appear at first, please try pressing the Esc key,
waiting a few seconds, and selecting the USB or USB2 option again.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 60 of 218


4. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/Select File Drive screen that
appears, select the drive that contains the existing differential or incremental
backup.

* If the existing backup resides on CD/DVD/BD discs, insert the first disc in
the set and then select the corresponding optical drive from the list.

* If the existing backup resides on a hard drive or a virtual drive, select the
applicable drive from the list shown and then select the correct partition.

5. On the Select Existing Backup File To Use/File Selection screen that


appears, select the .TBI file that corresponds to the desired existing
differential or incremental backup. You can type the name of the .TBI file (you
don’t need to type the .TBI file extension) or you can press Tab and then use
the arrow keys to highlight the file and press Enter to select it. If the .TBI file
resides inside a folder, highlight the folder and press Enter to display the
contents of the folder.

If you open a folder and want to navigate back to the parent folder, select the ..
list item and press Enter.

If you select a file that you created using the encryption or the password-
protect option, supply the correct password to continue.

Image for DOS will prompt for the locations of any backups in the selected
chain if it’s unable to locate them in the folder of the existing backup.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 61 of 218


6. On the Backup To/Select File Access Method screen that appears, choose
File (OS), File (Direct) or File (CD/DVD) to identify the location where you
want to save the consolidated backup files. You can select a CD/DVD/BD
drive, an external hard drive, a virtual drive, or a partition other than the one
used by the source images.

7. The appearance of the screen that Image for DOS displays next depends on
the choice you selected in Step 6. See Step 3 for a description of your choices.

8. On the Backup To/Select File Drive screen or the Backup To/Select Target
Drive screen that appears, select the target drive where you want to store the
consolidated backup. If appropriate, select the partition on which to store the
backup.

9. On the Backup To/File Name screen that appears, supply a name for the
consolidated backup file(s). The suggested name is the same as the selected
image to consolidate with “-Combined” appended. You can accept the
suggested name or supply one of your own. You do not have to supply a file
extension—just the path and file name itself—Image for DOS will add the
extension automatically. If you are using the File (OS) option, you must follow
DOS naming conventions and use a file name that does not exceed eight
characters.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 62 of 218


10. On the Backup Options screen that appears, select the options you want to
use. See the section “Understanding Consolidate Backup Options” on page 64
for an explanation of each option.

11. Select Next to display the Summary screen, which summarizes the
parameters of your backup.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to start a consolidate operation with
the options you selected in Image for DOS. When using IFD GUI, you can
save the command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image
for DOS by clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking OK. The
command line can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS)
file. To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command
option (above).

12. When you select Start, the consolidation process begins, and a progress bar
appears on-screen. When Image for DOS finishes, a message appears to let
you know that the consolidation process was successful. You can interrupt the
operation at any time by pressing the F12 key or clicking Exit. Image for DOS
will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it interrupts the current
operation.

Note: If a message appears stating that the discs created will not be bootable
because the CDBOOT.INS file was not found or it contained invalid references
appears, please refer to the section, “Customizing CDBOOT.F35” for information
on setting up CDBOOT.INS.

After you press Enter to dismiss the message, the main menu for Image for DOS
reappears. Select Exit and, when prompted, remove the Image for DOS boot media
and press Enter to reboot your computer.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 63 of 218


Understanding Consolidate Backup Options
The following options are available when consolidating backup images.

Validate – If you select this option, Image for DOS will perform internal consistency
checks on the backup file(s) after creating them. Enabling this option increases the
overall processing time, but can help ensure that the backup is reliable.

Delete Combined Files – Select this option to remove the combined files. The
original images files (those combined) will be deleted after the process has finished.
The combined image will assume the location in the chain – dependent image files
will still be valid. For example, if you have a chain of six images and combine the
first three, the fourth image will now be based on the new combined image.

Encrypt Data – If you select this option, Image for DOS will encrypt the backup
file(s) with 256-bit AES encryption prior to saving them to the target medium. If you
select the Encrypt Data option, you must also supply a password in the Password
text boxes. Enter the password in the first Password text box and retype it in the
second Password text box for verification.

Note: If you create a backup with the Encrypt Data option, you will need to
supply the password whenever you wish to validate the backup, restore it, or
open it in TBIView or TBIMount. If you lose and/or forget the password, you won’t
be able to open or restore from the backup. TeraByte Unlimited has no way of
recovering data from an encrypted backup with an unknown password.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 64 of 218


If you do not enable the Encrypt Data setting, Image for DOS will use the
Password text boxes to password-protect the image file without any encryption.

The maximum password length is 128 characters. Passwords are case sensitive
and may contain upper-case letters, lower-case letters, numbers, special
characters, spaces, and non-ASCII characters.

Disable Auto Eject – This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically
opening the optical drive tray. If you don’t select this option, Image for DOS will
open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the backup
operation.

Reboot When Completed – Use this option to automatically reboot your computer
after completing the consolidate operation.

Shutdown When Completed – Use this option to automatically shut down your
computer after completing the consolidate operation.

Log Results to File – Select this option to make Image for DOS log the details of
the consolidate operation. Image for DOS saves the log as IFD.LOG in the
IMAGE.EXE program directory. To be able to save IFD.LOG, Image for DOS must
be running from a writable medium such as a non-write-protected floppy diskette.
You can use the /logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for
IFD.LOG.

Faster Changes Only Backups – Select this option to have Image for DOS create
a hash file to speed up creating a Changes Only (differential or incremental)
backup. This option is only available when creating an image that is not being
saved to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). The hash file will be limited to the max file size
and have the same file name as the backup with an extension starting at .#0
followed by .#1, .#2, etc. as needed. The actual speed increase realized when
creating an image will vary depending on the system. If the hash file is deleted the
backup will proceed as normal without it. To create a hash file for an existing image
use the /hash operation command line parameter.

Note: This option will also create a special-use file with the .#_# extension. When
using the command line, this file can be used in place of the .TBI base image,
which may be located elsewhere (e.g. ftp, offsite), along with the hash file to create
a changes-only backup.

Use Metadata Hash Files – Select this option to have Image for DOS create a
hash file from the file system metadata to speed up creating a Changes Only
(differential or incremental) backup. This option is only supported for NTFS
partitions and relies on file system metadata to determine what gets backed up.
Using this option in conjunction with Faster Changes Only Backups can greatly
decrease the time required to create the backup. This option is not supported when
creating an image that is being saved to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). The hash file
will be limited to the max file size and have the same file name as the backup with
an extension starting at .@0 followed by .@1, .@2, etc. as needed. If the hash file
is deleted the backup will proceed as normal without it.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 65 of 218


NOTE: You should only use this option if you understand its impact on backup and
restore operations.

Validate Disk – If you store your backup on disc media (CD/DVD/BD), you can also
choose to validate each disc to ensure that no media errors occur while Image for
DOS stores the backup on each disc. If Image for DOS detects an error, it prompts
you to replace the failed disc at the time the error is detected. If you don’t enable
this option, Image for DOS notifies you of errors only after the backup process is
complete.

Limit Disk Usage – This option only applies when saving images to disc media
(CD/DVD/BD). If enabled, this option instructs Image for DOS to leave the last 10%
of each disc unused to help prevent data errors that are more common near the
edges of discs.

Compression – Select Standard or one of the Enhanced options to compress the


backup files that Image for DOS creates. With compression, Image for DOS
typically produces smaller image files but takes longer to back up. If you select
None, Image for DOS creates your backup more quickly but produces larger image
file(s). The attainable compression ratio depends on a number of factors, including
the number, size, and content of the files on the source partition and the level of file
fragmentation on the source partition. Typically, Image for DOS compresses
backup files 40% - 60%. However, if the source partition primarily contains files that
do not compress well, such as media files like MP3, JPG, and AVI, or archive files
like 7Z, RAR, and ZIP, the compression ratio will be much lower.

The Enhanced Size - A/B/C options provide greater compression, but the backups
may take considerably longer. The Enhanced Size - D/E/F options are faster than
their A/B/C counterparts, but offer slightly less compression. The Enhanced Speed
- A/B options offer decent compression with the emphasis on back up speed over
backup file size.

File Size – If you are saving the image to a hard disk, you may select this option to
choose the maximum size of the image files created by Image for DOS. The
available options are:

* Max – Automatically creates the largest file(s) allowed by the file system in use
on the target medium. For example, the largest files that may reside on FAT,
FAT32, and NTFS partitions are 2 GiB, 4 GiB, and (just under) 16 TiB,
respectively.

* 7.95 GiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to standard dual-layer
DVD disc(s).

* 4.37 GiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to standard single-layer
DVD disc(s).

* 4 GiB – Useful for FAT32 compatibility.

* 2 GiB – Useful for FAT compatibility.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 66 of 218


* 698 MiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to 700-MiB CD disc(s).

* 648 MiB – Useful if the image file(s) will later be burned to 650-MiB CD disc(s).

* You can also type in the desired value in bytes, Kibibytes (KiB), Mebibytes
(MiB), or Gibibytes (GiB). Decimal values are supported (e.g. 2.5GiB).

Write Speed – This option appears in place of the File Size option if you chose to
save your image to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). We recommend that you use the
default setting for this option, which is “Optimal,” unless you encounter problems.

Description – You can use this text box to assign descriptive text to individual
backups. The description you enter will be visible in the file list that appears when
you are preparing to restore or validate a backup. You view the description by
selecting the backup and pressing F1 or clicking the Information button.

Save Defaults (IFD GUI) or F4 (IFD) – Click/press to save the settings you
establish. In the future, Image for DOS will display these settings automatically.
Note that the settings will not be saved if IFD is unable to write to the IFD.INI (or
BOOTITBM.INI) file.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 67 of 218


Using Image for DOS to Restore a Backup
It is important to remember that you cannot restore an image over the partition that
contains the image file you are using to restore.

The size of the target location where you restore an image is important. The target
must be large enough to accommodate the data from the source partition. The
minimum amount of space required in the target location is determined by the
amount of space encompassed from the beginning of the source partition to the last
used area of the source partition. For example, if the source partition had 2 GB of
data, and the last part of that data ended 15 GB from the beginning of the source
partition, the target area needs to be at least 15 GB in size, regardless of the overall
size of the source partition.

If the target is larger than the source partition, there will be an area of free space
left over unless you use the “Resize Partition” option or perform the restore via
command line using the X parameter (as explained later in this manual).

Also, please remember the following.

* If your computer contains more than one CD/DVD/BD drive and you are
restoring using Image for DOS from disc media, please make sure that you
insert your Image for DOS bootable disc in one optical drive and no other optical
drive contains a bootable disc.

* Since the hard drive order during the boot process may be different than it is
while Windows is running, you may need to press a key when prompted to
access the Image for DOS menu that will allow you to select the appropriate
drive from which to restore.

Restoring From a Backup with Image for DOS


Insert your Image for DOS boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port and
boot your computer. Then, follow these steps:

1. On the Image for DOS Main Menu, select Restore.

2. On the Restore/Select screen that appears, select an option to determine how


Image for DOS handles the selection of the target drive and options:

* If you choose Automatic, Image for DOS attempts to choose the target
drive and options automatically using information stored in the backup
files. If Image for DOS cannot identify the target drive and options or you
don't accept the suggested target drive, Image for DOS will use the
Normal option and ask you to select the target drive and options.

Tip: Remember that you set the default values of many restore options
when creating the boot media. Enter the INI file options on the appropriate
page of the MakeDisk wizard. For example, if you wish the Automatic
Restore to expand your partitions (Scale to Fit) you would include the

Image for DOS User Manual Page 68 of 218


Expand=1 option in the [Restore_Defaults] section. See Creating the
Image for DOS Boot Media.

Note: Performing an automatic partial restore will not change the disk type
(MBR/EMBR/GPT) of the destination drive if it doesn’t match the type of
the source drive.

* If you choose Normal, Image for DOS will ask you to select the target
drive and options.

Note: If you created a backup in Image for Linux or Image for Windows and
restore using Image for DOS, Image for DOS might not be able to use the
Automatic option because Image for DOS might not be able to match the disk
signature in the backup with the target disk on the machine to which you want to
restore. In this case, Image for DOS uses the Normal option, where you select
the target drive and options.

3. From the Restore From/Select File Access Method screen that appears,
select between the following options, which refer to the location where Image
for DOS should look for the backup file you want to restore:

* File (Direct) – This option allows you to look for image file(s) in a folder on a
hard drive that does not have a drive letter assigned to it by DOS.

* File (OS) – This option appears only if you boot using a DOS boot disk that
you created using any method other than the MakeDisk utility. Choose this
option to use the operating system file services to restore the image files.
You must use this option when restoring images from a mapped network
drive.

* File (CD/DVD) – This option allows you to look for image file(s) on a
CD/DVD/BD disc.

4. On the Restore From/Select Drive Interface screen that appears, select one
of the following options. These options refer to how Image for DOS should
attempt to access the hard drive or CD/DVD/BD drive where your image is
stored:

If you chose File (Direct) in Step 3, you can choose one of the following
options:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor. In order to get the most out of this option when restoring an
image, you should select a File (Direct)—rather than File (OS)—for the File
Access Method of the image being restored.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 69 of 218


Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives at any time during the Restore process.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

* Virtual Drive – Use this option to locate and access virtual drives containing
images. If the virtual drive containing the image you want to restore doesn’t
appear in the Select File Drive list, you can press F2 or click Add Virtual
Drive and navigate to it to add it to the list.

If you chose File (CD/DVD) in Step 3, you can choose one of the following
options:

* ATAPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is an ATAPI device,


and none of the other selections apply. This is the most common option.

* ASPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive will be accessed using
an ASPI layer. (You must supply the ASPI driver for this option to work.)

* USB2 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to a USB 2


controller.

* IEEE1394 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to an


IEEE 1394 controller.

If your USB device does not appear at first, please try pressing the Esc key,
waiting a few seconds, and selecting the USB or USB2 option again.

5. Either the Restore From/Select File Drive screen shown in the following
figure or the Restore From/Select Target Drive screen appears, depending
on whether you are restoring from a hard drive or from CD/DVD/BD discs.
Select the target CD/DVD/BD drive or hard drive.

Note: If you select a hard drive, the Restore From/Select File Location on HD
screen appears. You can select a partition on the hard drive if it contains
partitions; otherwise, press Enter.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 70 of 218


6. On the Restore From/File Name screen, navigate to and select the backup
file you want to restore. Next, select either the entire drive or partitions to
restore. The options you can set in Step 10 change, depending on your choice
here. You can click the Information button to get details on the selected drive
or partition (e.g. number of MiB used, free, and needed to restore).

Note: If you select a differential or incremental backup to restore and Image for
DOS is unable to locate all of the base images, you will be prompted to locate the
required backup file(s). You will also have the option to restore in a single pass or
in multiple passes. If you stored your backup on CD/DVD/BD discs, select the
Multi Pass option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 71 of 218


7. On the Restore To/Select Drive Interface screen that appears, select the
access method you wish to use for the source hard drive. The choices on this
screen are the same as the choices described under Step 4 for the File
(Direct) option.

8. On the Restore To/Select Target Drive screen that appears, select the hard
drive onto which you want to restore the image you selected in Step 6.

9. Select a partition on the drive you selected in Step 8 where you want to restore
the image. Image for DOS displays a warning that explains that the partition
you select will be deleted before Image for DOS restores the image.

From the screen where you select a partition, you can do the following:

* Select a free space partition and press the Insert (Ins) key or click Create
Extended to create an extended partition. You can then restore the backup
to that partition.

* Select a partition and press the Delete (Del) key or click Delete to delete
the partition. You will be asked to confirm the deletion.

* Select a partition and press the F1 key or click Information to view the
number of MiB used, free, and needed to restore.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 72 of 218


* You can select a drive and press the F6 key or click Geometry to set the
geometry for the target drive. More information on this function appears in
the “Geometry Settings” section below.

* Press F8 or click Change Disk to change the drive type. This allows you to
change the partitioning scheme used on the drive. MBR, EMBR, and GPT
drive types are supported.

10. On the Restore Options screen that appears, select the options you want to
use while restoring. For an explanation of each option, see “Understanding
Restore Options for an Entire Drive” on Page 77 and “Understanding Restore
Options for an Individual Partition” on Page 81.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 73 of 218


11. Select Next to display the Summary screen, which summarizes the
parameters of the restore process you’re about to initiate.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to start a restore with the options
you selected in Image for DOS. When using IFD GUI, you can save the
command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image for DOS by
clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking OK. The command line
can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS)
file. To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command
option (above).

12. When you select Start, the restore process begins and a progress bar appears
on-screen. When Image for DOS finishes restoring, a message appears.

After you press Enter, the main menu for Image for DOS reappears. At this point, if
you are finished using Image for DOS, select Exit, remove the Image for DOS boot
media, and press Enter to reboot your computer.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 74 of 218


Note: Until you reboot, the operating system reflects the contents of the
drive/partition and file system in the state they were before you restored. Not
rebooting can cause data corruption. You can override the reboot prompt by
restoring using the command line /rb:0 switch, but do this only if you are an
advanced user and understand the potential ramifications of not rebooting.

Geometry Settings
If you restore an individual partition, you can use this window to override geometry
settings stored in the backup file.

The Geometry Override settings allow you to set alignment options as well as
specific Cylinder (C), Head (H), or Sector (S) to use for a particular drive. In addition
to manually entering the values, you can enable the Use MBR Geometry to have
Image for DOS set the geometry based on the MBR entry of the first partition in the
backup. Or, you can enable Use Original Geometry to have Image for DOS use the
geometry from the backup image that represents the geometry from the
environment used to create the backup.

This CHS option is helpful when you need to specify geometry values that differ
from those assigned by the operating environment, and you use this option when
you attach a hard drive from another machine to the USB port of another machine
to restore the first machine’s image.

C – Last Cylinder (0 to 1023)

H – Last Head (0 to 254)

S – Sectors per Track (1 to 63)

Image for DOS User Manual Page 75 of 218


Use MBR Geometry – Use drive geometry based on the MBR entry of the first
partition in the backup file. This is useful when restoring to a drive on a machine
separate from where the drive will ultimately be booted.

Validate MBR Geometry - This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the
MBR is aligned to known standards before accepting it for use. It only applies when
Use MBR Geometry is enabled.

Use Original Geometry – Use the drive geometry saved in the backup file that
represents the geometry from the environment used to create the backup file.

Align on End – Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align restored
partitions at the end of a cylinder, or when the Align on 1MiB Boundaries option is
enabled, at the end of a 1MiB boundary.

Align End by Resizing – Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align both
the beginning and end of a partition by resizing. This only affects partitions that
Image for DOS can resize.

Align on 1MiB Boundaries – Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align
restored partitions on 1MiB boundaries (drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned
on 2048 sectors; drives with 4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors).

Align MBR Ending HS – Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to force a
restored partition’s ending head and sector values in the MBR to match the current
geometry.

Align MBR HS when Truncated – Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to set
a restored partition’s head and sector values in the MBR to match the current
geometry when it is located outside the range of the current geometry.

Use Global Settings – Enable to allow global geometry settings to control the
drive.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 76 of 218


Understanding Restore Options for an Entire Drive
When you restore an entire drive, Image for DOS offers these options that you can
set:

Update Boot Partition - This option updates any references to the restored
partition in the active boot partition on the target drive. This is useful for situations
where the boot partition differs from the system partition. However, you typically
wouldn't want to use this option if you're creating a copy of an existing partition you
want to keep, unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive. For
this to be useful, the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or
part of the same copy or restore operation. Note: This option is not displayed if the
Automatic Boot Partition Update global option is enabled (the default).

Write Changed Sectors Only – Enable this option when restoring to write only the
changed sectors to the target drive (target will be read to compare). Useful in cases
where a large portion of the data is the same and it’s desirable to reduce wear on
the target drive (e.g. restoring to SSD drive). This option is unavailable if not
supported by the drive.

Scale to Fit – On FAT, FAT32, NTFS, or EXT 2/3/4 file systems, selecting this
option will make Image for DOS assume that the size of the original hard drive is
based on the location of the end of the last partition; Image for DOS then applies
the same scaling to the target hard drive. If any unpartitioned space existed at the
end of the source drive, that unpartitioned space won’t exist on the target drive after
you restore your image. This option has no effect on images restored to hard drives

Image for DOS User Manual Page 77 of 218


using other file systems. You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to
Target option. If you inadvertently enable both options, Scale to Fit will take
precedence.

Align to Target – If you select this option, Image for DOS will force alignment to
the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive. For example,
if the Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries global option is enabled the restored
drive will be aligned on 1MiB boundaries. If this option is not selected, the alignment
used on the target drive will be determined automatically based on the source drive.

Change Disk ID and GUIDs – This option only applies to full drive restores. It
allows you to change the NT Signature restored to the target drive. For target GPT
drives, the MBR NT Signature, the GPT Disk GUID, and the partition GUIDs will all
be changed. This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and restored
hard drive in the same computer at the same time; otherwise Windows may detect
the duplicate signature and modify it which may (depending on the OS) prevent the
restored hard drive from booting properly.

Validate Before Restore – If you select this option, Image for DOS will validate the
image file(s) prior to restoring them, will perform internal consistency checks on the
backup file(s). If Image for DOS encounters an error during validation, Image for
DOS will abort the restore operation without overwriting the partition. If you select
this option, the overall processing time Image for DOS takes to restore the image
will increase, but you can restore the image with greater certainty that the restored
image will be reliable.

Validate Byte-for-Byte – If you select this option, Image for DOS will verify that
every byte in the source backup image file was written back to the drive correctly,
ensuring 100% accuracy. This option generally increases the processing time of the
overall backup operation, but is advisable to use where maximum reliability is
required.

Write Standard MBR Code – If you select this option, Image for DOS will install
standard master boot code to the Master Boot Record (MBR) after completing the
restore operation. The other portions of the MBR (i.e. the partition table, disk
signature, etc.) will not be affected. Otherwise, Image for DOS will only install the
standard master boot code when it appears that there is no existing boot code.

Wipe Unused Sectors – This option will wipe (zero-out) unused sectors on the
restored drive. When restoring a full drive, the entire drive is wiped, including all
gaps between any partitions. Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive
and restore in a single operation (such as when deploying images to used
systems).

Remove Gaps on Restore – Select this option to remove any gaps (free space)
between partitions. Partitions will be restored adjacent to each other.

GPT Hidden From OS – Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate
that the operating system being restored will not see the destination drive as GPT
when booted. For example, an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the 0xEE

Image for DOS User Manual Page 78 of 218


placeholder partition is missing from the MBR. Using this option prevents Image for
DOS from using GPT specific fix-up information on the drive after the restore.

Compact Data – Use this option to have Image for DOS compact
FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions during the restore so they fit into the space needed to
hold the data. This is useful when restoring to a smaller drive or partition and the
source drive/partition was not compacted beforehand.

Note: A clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent the resize from
succeeding will result in the destination partition being deleted (the data is not
usable).

Assume Original HD – If you select this option, which mainly applies to Linux
partitions, Image for DOS will keep references to the source hard drive number
intact within the partitions that have been restored to the target. If you do not select
this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive,
applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to
reflect the new hard drive number.

This option has no effect if you are restoring to a target drive whose number
matches that of the source drive. If you are restoring to a target drive whose
number differs from that of the source drive, but you plan to subsequently move the
target drive so that its number matches the source drive again, enabling this option
can be beneficial.

Scale to Target – If you use this option when restoring an image, Image for DOS
restores the image proportionally to the target drive. For example, suppose that you
backed up a 250 GB hard drive and restored the image to a 500 GB hard drive. If
you use this option, you allow Image for DOS to double the size of the restored
image. This option only works for FAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT2/3/4 file systems
and has no effect on images restored to hard drives using other file systems. You
cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to Fit option. If you
inadvertently enable both options, Scale to Fit will take precedence.

Ignore IO Errors – Under ordinary circumstances, if Image for DOS encounters a


bad sector on the target partition while restoring, Image for DOS will notify you
concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort. If you select
the Ignore IO Errors option, Image for DOS will ignore the error and continue.
Generally, you should select this option only if you need to restore to a target drive
that contains known bad sectors. On some systems, if you select this setting and
Image for DOS encounters bad sectors, there will be a significant delay as the
internal retry/recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector(s). In
addition, some systems may hang if the BIOS option is used to access the source
drive. In such cases, try using the BIOS (Direct) option instead.

Disable Auto Eject – This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically
opening the optical drive tray. If you don’t select this option, Image for DOS will
open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the restore
operation.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 79 of 218


Reboot When Completed – Use this option to automatically reboot your computer
after the restore finishes.

Shutdown When Completed – Use this option to automatically shut down your
computer after the restore finishes.

Log Results to File – Select this option to make Image for DOS log the details of
the restore operation. Image for DOS saves the log as IFD.LOG in the IMAGE.EXE
program directory. To be able to save IFD.LOG, Image for DOS must be running
from a writable medium such as a non-write-protected floppy diskette or UFD. You
can use the /logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFD.LOG.

Change Volume SN – Select this option to change the file system volume serial
number of restored FAT//FAT32/NTFS/HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2/3/4
partitions.

Unmap/Trim Target Area – Use this option to TRIM the target area of the restore
destination drive prior to restoring the image. This option is only available if the
target drive supports TRIM.

Metadata Based Restore – If the backup image being restored has a metadata
hash file you can select this option to restore using the file system metadata of
supported partitions (NTFS). Depending on the system and the data being restored,
this type of restore may be considerably faster than a normal restore. Due to this
type of restore depending on the destination partition’s file system metadata being
valid, you would use it for undoing changes and not for recovering from file system
corruption (a normal restore should be used in that case). This option will be
ignored if Multi-Pass, Compact Data, or Wipe Unused Sectors is selected.

NOTE: You should only use this option if you understand its impact on restore
operations.

First Track Sectors – This text box allows you to specify how many sectors of the
first track of the hard drive should be restored. If you enter AUTO in this box, the
tracks needed for the EMBR will be restored. If you aren’t sure, type AUTO in this
box.

Save Defaults (IFD GUI) or F4 (IFD) – Click/press to save the settings you
establish. In the future, Image for DOS will display these settings automatically.
Note that the settings will not be saved if IFD is unable to write to the IFD.INI (or
BOOTITBM.INI) file.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 80 of 218


Understanding Restore Options for an Individual Partition
When you restore an individual partition, Image for DOS offers these options that
you can set:

Multi-Pass – Use this option to tell Image for DOS to use Multi Pass mode when
restoring a differential or incremental backup. In Multi Pass mode, Image for DOS
restores the full backup in one pass and then restores the differential backup in a
second pass or incrementals in multiple passes. This setting is not applicable when
restoring a full backup. You must use this option if the applicable full backup resides
on removable media.

Set Active – If you select this option, Image for DOS will make the restored
partition the active partition after completing the restore operation. Otherwise,
Image for DOS will make the restored partition active only if no other partition is
active and the target drive is HD0.

Update BOOT.INI – When you select this option, Image for DOS updates all
partition(w) entries in the boot.ini file found in the restored location to point to itself.
This can be useful when restoring Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows 2003 operating systems to a new drive or location.

Write Changed Sectors Only – Enable this option when restoring to write only the
changed sectors to the target drive (target will be read to compare). Useful in cases
where a large portion of the data is the same and it’s desirable to reduce wear on

Image for DOS User Manual Page 81 of 218


the target drive (e.g. restoring to SSD drive). This option is unavailable if not
supported by the drive.

Update Boot Partition - This option updates any references to the restored
partition in the active boot partition on the target drive. This is useful for situations
where the boot partition differs from the system partition. However, you typically
wouldn't want to use this option if you're creating a copy of an existing partition you
want to keep, unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive. For
this to be useful, the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or
part of the same copy or restore operation.

Write Standard MBR Code – If you select this option, Image for DOS will install
standard master boot code to the Master Boot Record (MBR) after completing the
restore operation. The other portions of the MBR (i.e. the partition table, disk
signature(s), etc.) will not be affected. Otherwise, Image for DOS will install the
standard master boot code only when it appears that there is no existing boot code.

Restore Disk Signature – This option applies when you restore a partition that had
been assigned a drive letter within Windows prior to being backed up. If you select
this option, Image for DOS will restore the disk signature associated with the source
partition. If you don’t select this option, Image for DOS will use the disk signature
already present in the MBR of the target drive; if none exists, Image for DOS will
create one. If you are restoring a partition that had been assigned a drive letter in
Windows and you wish to keep that drive letter assignment, select this option. For
GPT drives the disk GUID will not be changed.

Restore First Track – Whenever you back up any partition, Image for DOS also
backs up the first track of the source hard drive. If you select this option, Image for
DOS will restore the first track, which includes the master boot code and the disk
signature, enabling you to restore the MBR/EMBR. Restoring the first track may
also change the disk type (MBR/EMBR/GPT) of the destination drive if it doesn’t
match that of the source drive (the restore will abort if the change is required and
cannot be applied).

Validate Before Restore – If you select this option, Image for DOS will validate the
image file(s) prior to restoring them. If Image for DOS encounters an error during
validation, Image for DOS will abort the restore operation without overwriting the
target.

Change GUID – When restoring to a GPT drive, selecting this option will change
the GUID of each partition restored.

Validate Byte-for-Byte – If you select this option, Image for DOS will verify that
every byte in the source data was restored correctly, ensuring 100% accuracy. This
option generally doubles the processing time of the overall operation, but is
advisable to use where maximum reliability is required. You can but do not need to
select the Validate Before Restore option if you select the Validate Byte-for-Byte
option.

Wipe Unused Sectors – This option will wipe (zero-out) unused sectors in the
restored partition(s) or drive, depending on the type of restore performed.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 82 of 218


When restoring single partitions or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with
existing partitions, sectors located outside of the restored partition(s) are not wiped.
If a partition is resized during the restore, the wiped area for that partition is the final
size of the restored partition (not the size of the source partition).

When restoring multiple partitions to a drive with no existing partitions, the entire
drive is wiped, including all gaps between any partitions. Using this option provides
an easy way to wipe a drive and restore in a single operation (such as when
deploying images to used systems).

Compact Data – Use this option to have Image for DOS compact the partition
during the restore so it fits into the space needed to hold the data
(FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions only). This is useful when restoring to a smaller
partition and the source partition was not compacted beforehand.

Note: A clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent the resize from
succeeding will result in the destination partition being deleted (the data is not
usable).

This option is not applicable if the Multi-Pass option is used.

Move to Original MBR Entry – If you select this option, Image for DOS will move
the partition table entry of the restored partition to the same location in the master
partition table as it had on the source drive. Image for DOS will also move the
existing partition table entry to another location rather than overwrite it. You may
want to enable this option if you use an environment that tracks master partition
table entries, such as Linux.

GPT Hidden From OS – Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate
that the operating system being restored will not see the destination drive as GPT
when booted. For example, an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the 0xEE
placeholder partition is missing from the MBR. Using this option prevents Image for
DOS from using GPT specific fix-up information on the drive after the restore.

Assume Original HD – If you select this option, which mainly applies to Linux
partitions, Image for DOS will keep references to the source hard drive number
intact within the partitions that have been restored to the target. If you do not select
this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive,
applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to
reflect the new hard drive number.

This option has no effect if you are restoring to a target drive whose number
matches that of the source drive. If you are restoring to a target drive whose
number differs from that of the source drive, but you plan to subsequently move the
target drive so that its number matches the source drive again, enabling this option
can be beneficial.

Ignore IO Errors – Under ordinary circumstances, if Image for DOS encounters a


bad sector on the target drive while restoring an image, Image for DOS will notify
you concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort. If you
select the Ignore IO Errors option, Image for DOS will ignore the error and continue.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 83 of 218


Generally, you should select this option only if you need to restore to a target drive
that contains known bad sectors. On some systems, if you select this setting and
Image for DOS encounters bad sectors, there will be a significant delay as the
internal retry/recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector(s). In
addition, some systems may hang if the BIOS option is used to access the source
drive. In such cases, try using the BIOS (Direct) option instead.

Disable Auto Eject – This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically
opening the optical drive tray. If you don’t select this option, Image for DOS will
open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the restore
operation.

Reboot When Completed – Use this option to automatically reboot your computer
after the restore finishes.

Shutdown When Completed – Use this option to automatically shut down your
computer after the restore finishes.

Log Results to File – Select this option to make Image for DOS log the details of
the restore operation. Image for DOS saves the log as IFD.LOG in the IMAGE.EXE
program directory. To be able to save IFD.LOG, Image for DOS must be running
from a writable medium such as a non-write-protected floppy diskette or UFD. You
can use the /logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFD.LOG.

Change Volume SN – Select this option to change the file system volume serial
number of restored FAT//FAT32/NTFS/HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2/3/4
partitions.

Unmap/Trim Target Area – Use this option to TRIM the target area of the restore
destination drive prior to restoring the image. This option is only available if the
target drive supports TRIM.

Metadata Based Restore – If the backup image being restored has a metadata
hash file you can select this option to restore using the file system metadata of
supported partitions (NTFS). Depending on the system and the data being restored,
this type of restore may be considerably faster than a normal restore. Due to this
type of restore depending on the destination partition’s file system metadata being
valid, you would use it for undoing changes and not for recovering from file system
corruption (a normal restore should be used in that case). This option will be
ignored if Multi-Pass, Compact Data, or Wipe Unused Sectors is selected.

NOTE: You should only use this option if you understand its impact on restore
operations.

First Track Sectors – This text box allows you to specify how many sectors of the
first track of the hard drive should be restored. If you enter AUTO in this box, the
tracks needed for the EMBR will be restored. If you aren’t sure, type AUTO in this
box.

Resize Partition – Currently available only for FAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT 2/3/4
partitions, you can use this text box to specify a new size for the restored partition,

Image for DOS User Manual Page 84 of 218


bound by the Minimum and Maximum values specified by Image for DOS. The
units used here are mebibytes, abbreviated MiB. (Please refer to the section titled
Data Storage Size Unit Conventions at the beginning of this manual for more
information.)

New Name – Enter the new volume name (label) for the restored partition. If left
blank the name will not be changed from its restored value.

Save Defaults (IFD GUI) or F4 (IFD) – Click/press to save the settings you
establish. In the future, Image for DOS will display these settings automatically.
Note that the settings will not be saved if IFD is unable to write to the IFD.INI (or
BOOTITBM.INI) file.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 85 of 218


Validating Backups with Image for DOS
You can use Image for DOS to validate backups at the time you create them and
also before you restore a backup. You also can validate a backup at any time using
the instructions provided below.

When you validate a backup, Image for DOS performs internal consistency checks
on the backup file(s), helping to ensure that the backup will be reliable if you need
to restore from it.

When you use the steps that follow to validate a backup, Image for DOS performs a
standard validation, not a byte-for-byte validation, which provides a more intense
scrutiny of a backup file. You can perform a byte-for-byte validation only as part of a
backup operation. See the section, “Understanding Backup Options” on Page 47 for
details on a byte-for-byte validation.

Validating a Backup
Insert your Image for DOS boot media into the appropriate drive or USB port and
boot your computer. Then, follow these steps:

1. On the Image for DOS Main Menu/Select Operation screen, select Validate.

2. On the Validate/Select File Access Method screen that appears, choose one
of the following options, which refer to the location where Image for DOS
should look for the backup to validate:

* File (OS) – This option appears only if you boot using a DOS boot disk that
you created using any method other than the MakeDisk utility. Choose this
option to use the operating system file services to save the image files. You
must use this option when saving images to a mapped network drive.

* File (Direct) – Select this option if the image file(s) you want to validate are
stored on a hard drive that does not have a drive letter assigned to it by
DOS.

* File (CD/DVD) – Select this option if the image file(s) you want to validate
are stored on CD, DVD, or BD discs.

3. On the Validate /Select Drive Interface screen that appears, select one of the
following options; these options refer to how Image for DOS should attempt to
access the hard drive that contains the image you want to validate:

If you chose File (Direct) in Step 2, you can choose one of the following
options:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can

Image for DOS User Manual Page 86 of 218


sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor.

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

* Virtual Drive – Select this option if you want to validate a backup stored on
a virtual drive. Select your virtual drive from the list or, if your virtual drive
doesn’t appear in the list, press F2 or click Add Virtual Drive to add a virtual
drive to the list.

If you chose File (CD/DVD) in Step 2, you can choose one of the following
options:

* ATAPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is an ATAPI device,


and none of the other selections apply. This is the most common option.

* ASPI – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive will be accessed using
an ASPI layer. (You must supply the ASPI driver for this option to work.)

* USB2 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to a USB 2


controller.

* IEEE1394 – Select this option if your CD/DVD/BD drive is attached to an


IEEE 1394 controller.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 87 of 218


4. Either the Validate/Select File Drive shown in the figure or the
Validate/Select Target Drive screen appears, depending on whether you are
validating an image stored on a hard drive or on CD/DVD/BD discs. For
images stored on CD/DVD/BD discs, insert the first disc in the set and then
select the corresponding optical drive from the list. If you select a hard drive,
the Validate/Select File Location on HD screen appears. After you select the
hard drive, you can select a partition on the hard drive if it contains partitions.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 88 of 218


5. On the screen that appears, type the name of the image file you want to
validate. You do not have to supply a file extension—just the path and file
name itself. If you prefer, use the Tab key and the arrow keys to navigate to
the image file you want to validate.

If you select a differential or incremental backup to validate and Image for DOS
is unable to locate all of the base images, you will be prompted to locate the
required backup file(s).

6. On the Validate/Select Item to Process screen, choose to validate the drive


or a partition.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 89 of 218


7. On the Validate Options screen that appears, select the options you want to
use. See the section, “Understanding Validation Options” on Page 91 for an
explanation of each option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 90 of 218


8. Select Next to display the Summary screen, which summarizes the
parameters of the restore process you’re about to initiate.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to start a validation with the options
you selected in Image for DOS. When using IFD GUI, you can save the
command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image for DOS by
clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking OK. The command line
can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS)
file. To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command
option (above).

9. When you select Start, the validation process begins and a progress bar
appears on-screen. When Image for DOS finishes validating the selected
backup, a message appears. You can interrupt the validation operation at any
time by pressing the F12 key or clicking Exit. Image for DOS will ask you to
confirm that you want to cancel before it interrupts the operation.

After you press Enter to dismiss the message that appears when Image for DOS
finishes validating, the main menu for Image for DOS reappears. At this point, if you
are finished using Image for DOS, select Exit, remove the Image for DOS boot
media, and press Enter to reboot your computer.

Understanding Validation Options


There are several options available when you validate an image:

Disable Auto Eject – This option prevents Image for DOS from automatically
opening the optical drive tray. If you don’t select this option, Image for DOS will
open the drive tray whenever a disc is needed and at the completion of the restore
operation.

Log Results to File – Select this option to make Image for DOS log the details of
the validation operation. Image for DOS saves the log as IFD.LOG in the
IMAGE.EXE program directory. To be able to save IFD.LOG, Image for DOS must
be running from a writable medium such as a non-write-protected floppy diskette or
UFD. You can use the /logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for
IFD.LOG.

Save Defaults (IFD GUI) or F4 (IFD) – Click/press to save the settings you
establish. In the future, Image for DOS will display these settings automatically.
Note that the settings will not be saved if IFD is unable to write to the IFD.INI (or
BOOTITBM.INI) file.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 91 of 218


Copying Partitions or Drives with Image for DOS
You can use the Copy operation to place a copy of the contents of one partition or
drive on another partition or drive. Suppose, for example, that you have a hard drive
all set up and configured just the way you want it, and you want to clone that setup
so that you can place it in another computer. You can use the Copy operation.

Copying a Partition or Drive


Using the Copy operation, Image for DOS makes a sector-by-sector copy of the
used areas of the partition or drive you select and places that copy on the partition
or drive you designate, overwriting any information stored on the target location. If
the partition or drive you copy is a bootable partition or drive, the copy will also be
bootable.

Note: Unless you copy an entire drive, Image for DOS does not automatically set
the copy as the active boot partition unless you select the Set Active option.

To create a copy of a partition or drive, follow these steps:

1. On the Main Menu/Select Operation screen of Image for DOS, select Copy
and press Enter.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 92 of 218


2. On the Copy From/Select Drive Interface screen, select one of the following
options; these options refer to how Image for DOS should attempt to access
the drive that contains the partition you want to copy:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor.

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

* Virtual Drive – Enables you to select a virtual drive to copy. If the virtual
drive doesn’t appear in the Select File Drive list, you can press F2 or click
Add Virtual Drive and navigate to it to add it to the list.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 93 of 218


3. On the Copy From/Select Source Drive screen, select the hard drive that you
want to copy or the hard drive that contains the partition you want to copy.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 94 of 218


4. On the Copy From/Select Copy Location on HDn screen that appears,
select the drive or partition you wish to copy.

When a partition is highlighted, the following options are available:

Delete – Press the Del key or click Delete to delete the selected partition. You will
be prompted to confirm the deletion.

Details/Information – Press F1 or click Information to view the details of the


partition (used space, free space, size needed to restore, etc.).

Compact – Press F3 or click Compact to compact the partition’s file system.


FAT/FAT32 and NTFS file systems are supported. This option allows you to
reduce the size required for a restore. You will be prompted to confirm the
compaction and then asked for the compaction value (size in MiB).

For example, if you have a 250GB partition that contains 50GB of data and
requires 150GB of space to restore and you need to copy it to a 100GB
partition, you can compact the file system to under 100GB before copying it to
the 100GB partition.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 95 of 218


5. On the Copy To/Select Drive Interface screen that appears, select one of the
following options. These options refer to how Image for DOS should attempt to
access the target hard drive:

* BIOS – Locates and accesses drives using the system BIOS. Please note
that any problems or limitations inherent to the system BIOS will apply.

* BIOS (Direct) – Attempts to locate the hard drive using the system BIOS,
but then attempts to access it directly, bypassing the BIOS. This can
sometimes be helpful in cases where performance with the BIOS option is
very poor.

Use BIOS (direct) when you are going to be accessing SATA hard drives and
CD/DVD/BD drives or using the BIOS (direct) option anywhere.

* USB – Examines the attached USB controller, if any, for available high-
speed hard drives. If your USB device does not appear at first, please try
pressing the Esc key, waiting a few seconds, and selecting the USB or
USB2 option again.

* IEEE1394 – Examines the attached IEEE 1394 controller, if any, for


available hard drives.

* Virtual Drive – Enables you to select a single file virtual drive on which to
store a copy. Note that a new virtual drive must be partitioned and formatted
before you can use it.

6. On the Copy To/Select Target Drive screen that appears, select the drive on
which you want to place the copy. Image for DOS displays a warning that
indicates that all data in the target partition or on the target drive will be
overwritten and lost. Select Yes.

7. Image for DOS displays options you can select. See the “Understanding Copy
Options” section on page 97 for an explanation of each option.

8. Select Next. On the Summary screen that appears, click Start when you are
ready to begin the Copy process. A progress bar appears on-screen. You can
interrupt the operation at any time by clicking Exit or pressing the F12 key.
Image for DOS will ask you to confirm that you want to cancel before it
interrupts the operation.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to start a copy with the options you
selected in Image for DOS. When using IFD GUI, you can save the command
line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image for DOS by clicking
the Save to File checkbox and then clicking OK. The command line can be
edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS)

Image for DOS User Manual Page 96 of 218


file. To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command
option (above).

When Image for DOS finishes, a message appears to inform you that the copy was
successfully created.

Understanding Copy Options


During the copy process, you can set a variety of options. These options will vary
depending on whether you are copying an entire disk or a partition. Options
available when copying an entire disk are shown in the figure below.

Write Changed Sectors Only – Enable this option when copying to write only the
changed sectors to the target drive (target will be read to compare). Useful in cases
where a large portion of the data is the same and it’s desirable to reduce wear on
the target drive (e.g. copying partition to SSD drive). This option is unavailable if not
supported by the drive.

Scale to Fit – On FAT, FAT32, NTFS, or EXT 2/3/4 file systems, selecting this
option will make Image for DOS assume that the size of the original hard drive is
based on the location of the end of the last partition; Image for DOS then applies
the same scaling to the target hard drive. If any unpartitioned space exists at the
end of the source drive, that unpartitioned space won’t exist on the target drive after
you restore your image. This option has no effect on copies made to hard drives
using other file systems. You cannot use this option in conjunction with the Scale to

Image for DOS User Manual Page 97 of 218


Target option. If you inadvertently enable both options, Scale to Fit will take
precedence.

Align to Target – If you select this option, Image for DOS will force alignment to
the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive. For example,
if the Align Partitions on 1MiB Boundaries global option is enabled the restored
drive will be aligned on 1MiB boundaries. If this option is not selected, the alignment
used on the target drive will be determined automatically based on the source drive.

Change Disk ID and GUIDs – This option only applies to full drive copies. It allows
you to change the NT Signature restored to the target drive. For target GPT drives,
the MBR NT Signature, the GPT Disk GUID, and the partition GUIDs will all be
changed. This can be useful if you plan on having both the original and restored
hard drive in the same computer at the same time; otherwise Windows may detect
the duplicate signature and modify it which may (depending on the OS) prevent the
restored hard drive from booting properly.

Validate Byte-for-Byte – If you select this option, Image for DOS will verify that
every byte in the source location was written to the target location correctly,
ensuring 100% accuracy. This option generally increases the processing time of the
overall operation, but we advise you use this option where maximum reliability is
required.

Write Standard MBR Code – If you select this option, Image for DOS will install
standard master boot code to the Master Boot Record (MBR) after completing the
copy operation. The other portions of the MBR (i.e. the partition table, disk
signature, etc.) will not be affected. Otherwise, Image for DOS will install the
standard master boot code only when it appears that there is no existing boot code.

Copy Unused Sectors – By default, Image for DOS copies only sectors in use. If
you select this option, Image for DOS will copy all sectors on a partition or drive,
regardless of whether they contain data. For entire drive copies, this option causes
a raw sector by sector copy of the entire drive without regard to any partitions or
adjustments. NOTE: This option causes Image for DOS to ignore the Omit Page
File Data and Omit Hibernation Data options.

Wipe Target Unused Sectors – This option will wipe (zero-out) unused sectors in
the copied partition(s) or drive, depending on the type of copy performed.

When copying single partitions or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with
existing partitions, sectors located outside of the copied partition(s) are not wiped. If
a partition is resized during the copy, the wiped area for that partition is the final
size of the copied partition (not the size of the source partition).

When copying a full drive or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with no
existing partitions, the entire drive is wiped, including all gaps between any
partitions. Using this option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and copy to it in a
single operation.

Omit Page File Data – Selected by default, this option eliminates page file data
from the copy process.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 98 of 218


Omit Hibernation Data – Selected by default, this option eliminates hibernation
data from the copy process.

Omit $UsnJrnl Data – Selecting this option will omit the NTFS $UsnJrnl data from
the copy process.

Remove Gaps on Copy – Select this option to remove any gaps (free space)
between partitions. Partitions will be copied adjacent to each other.

GPT Hidden From OS – Use this option when copying to a GPT drive to indicate
that the operating system being copied will not see the destination drive as GPT
when booted. For example, an iMac using BootCamp or cases where the 0xEE
placeholder partition is missing from the MBR. Using this option prevents Image for
DOS from using GPT specific fix-up information on the drive after the copy
completes.

Compact Data – Use this option to have Image for DOS compact
FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions during the copy operation so they fit into the space
needed to hold the data. This is useful when restoring to a smaller drive or partition
and the source drive/partition was not compacted beforehand.

Note: A clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent the resize from
succeeding will result in the destination partition being deleted (the data is not
usable).

Assume Original HD – If you select this option, which mainly applies to Linux
partitions, Image for DOS will keep references to the source hard drive number
intact within the partitions that have been copied to the target location. If you do not
select this option and the target drive number differs from that of the source drive,
applicable drive references residing within the restored partitions will be updated to
reflect the new hard drive number.

This option has no effect if you are copying to a target drive whose number
matches that of the source drive. If you are copying to a target drive whose number
differs from that of the source drive, but you plan to subsequently move the target
drive so that its number matches the source drive again, enabling this option can be
beneficial.

Scale to Target – If you use this option when copying a disk or partition, Image for
DOS copies the image proportionally to the target drive. For example, suppose that
you want to copy a 250 GB hard drive to a 500 GB hard drive. If you use this option,
you allow Image for DOS to double the size of the copy. This option only works for
FAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT 2/3/4 file systems and has no effect on copies made
to hard drives using other file systems. You cannot use this option in conjunction
with the Scale to Fit option. If you inadvertently enable both options, Scale to Fit
will take precedence.

Ignore IO Errors – Under ordinary circumstances, if Image for DOS encounters a


bad sector on the target drive while copying, Image for DOS will notify you
concerning the write error and give you the option to continue or abort. If you select
the Ignore IO Errors option, Image for DOS will ignore the error and continue.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 99 of 218


Generally, you should select this option only if you need to copy to a target drive
that contains known bad sectors. On some systems, if you select this setting and
Image for DOS encounters bad sectors, there will be a significant delay as the
internal retry/recovery routine of the drive attempts to handle the bad sector(s).

Ignore Validate B4B Errors – Prevent byte-for-byte validation failures from being
considered an error. The backup operation will continue instead of aborting (errors
will still be logged). This is only useful for conditions where it's known that system
memory, devices, cables are reliable.

Reboot When Completed – Selecting this option tells Image for DOS to reboot the
computer after completing the copy operation.

Shutdown When Completed - Selecting this option tells Image for DOS to shut
down the computer after completing the copy operation.

Log Results to File – Select this option to make Image for DOS log the details of
the copy operation. Image for DOS saves the log as IFD.LOG in the IMAGE.EXE
program directory. To be able to save IFD.LOG, Image for DOS must be running
from a writable medium such as a non-write-protected floppy diskette or UFD. You
can use the /logfile or LogFile options to specify an alternate location for IFD.LOG.

Change Volume SN – Select this option to change the file system volume serial
number of copied FAT//FAT32/NTFS/HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2/3/4
partitions.

Unmap/Trim Target Area – Use this option to TRIM the target area of the copy
destination drive prior to performing the copy operation. This option is only available
if the target drive supports TRIM.

Set Active – If you select this option, Image for DOS will make the copied partition
the active partition after completing the copy operation. Otherwise, Image for DOS
will make the copied partition active only if no other partition is active and the target
drive is HD0.

Update BOOT.INI – When you select this option, Image for DOS will update all
partition(w) entries in the boot.ini file found in the target location to point to itself.
This can be useful when copying Windows NT, Windows 2000, Windows XP, and
Windows 2003 operating systems to a new drive or location.

Update Boot Partition – This option updates any references to the copied partition
in the active boot partition on the target drive. This is useful for situations where the
boot partition differs from the system partition. However, you typically wouldn't want
to use this option if you're creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep,
unless the target drive will be independent of the original drive. For this to be useful,
the active boot partition should already be on the target drive or part of the same
copy operation. Note: This option is not displayed when copying a full drive if the
Automatic Boot Partition Update global option is enabled (the default).

Copy Disk Signature – This option applies when you copy a partition that had
been assigned a drive letter within Windows. If you select this option, Image for

Image for DOS User Manual Page 100 of 218


DOS will copy the disk signature associated with the source partition. If you don’t
select this option, Image for DOS will use the disk signature already present in the
MBR of the target drive; if none exists, Image for DOS will create one. If you are
copying a partition that had been assigned a drive letter in Windows and you wish
to keep that drive letter assignment, select this option. For GPT drives the disk
GUID will not be changed.

Copy First Track – If you select this option, Image for DOS will copy the first track
of the source hard drive, which includes the master boot code and the disk
signature. This enables you to restore the MBR/EMBR. Copying the first track may
also change the disk type (MBR/EMBR/GPT) of the destination drive if it doesn’t
match that of the source drive (the copy will abort if the change is required and
cannot be applied).

Change GUID – When copying to a GPT drive, selecting this option will change the
GUID of each partition copied.

Move to Original MBR Entry – If you select this option, Image for DOS will move
the partition table entry of the copied partition to the same location in the master
partition table as it had on the source drive. Image for DOS will also move the
existing partition table entry to another location rather than overwrite it. You may
want to enable this option if you use an environment that tracks master partition
table entries, such as Linux.

Resize Partition – Currently available only for FAT, FAT32, NTFS, and EXT 2/3/4
partitions, you can use this text box to specify a new size for the copied partition,
bound by the Minimum and Maximum values specified by Image for DOS. The
units used here are mebibytes, abbreviated MiB. (Please refer to the section titled
Data Storage Size Unit Conventions at the beginning of this manual for more
information.)

New Name – Enter the new volume name (label) for the copied partition. If left
blank the name will not be changed from its copied value.

Save Defaults (IFD GUI) or F4 (IFD) – Click/press to save the settings you
establish. In the future, Image for DOS will display these settings automatically.
Note that the settings will not be saved if IFD is unable to write to the IFD.INI (or
BOOTITBM.INI) file.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 101 of 218


Using Simple Operations Mode
Simple Operations mode allows Image for DOS to automatically handle most
options for you. Backup, Restore, Validate, and Copy operations are available in
this mode. To use Simple Operations mode, enable the Simple Operations option
in Settings.

Backups are saved to a store on the destination drive (e.g.


\TeraByte_TBI_Backups). The storage area is automatically maintained and files
are deleted as needed when it runs out of free space.

Creating a Backup
To create a backup of a drive you simply choose which physical drive you want to
back up and, if needed, which drive you want to save to.

1. Select Backup this computer to an alternate drive on the main window and
click Next.

2. Select the drive you wish to back up and then click Next. The drive letters
shown are as assigned by the first Windows installation found on the system.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 102 of 218


Clicking the Information button will show details about the selected drive,
including a list of the partitions.

Click the Compact button (press F3 with console version) to compact


FAT/FAT32 and NTFS partitions on the drive. This option allows you to reduce
the size required for a restore. You will be prompted to confirm the compaction
and then asked for the compaction value (size in MiB). For example, if you have
a 480GB drive that contains 50GB of data and requires 150GB of space to
restore and you need to restore it to a 128GB drive, you can compact the drive
to under 128GB before imaging it and then restore it to the 128GB drive.

3. Select where you want to save the backup and then click Next.

Note: By default, if a store already exists for the drive being backed up you will
not be prompted to select one (the existing store will be used).

4. Select the partition on the target drive to use for the backup store and then click
Next.

5. The summary screen is shown. Click Start to create the backup.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to perform the operation. When using
IFD GUI, you can save the command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file
that runs Image for DOS by clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking
OK. The command line can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file.
To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command option
(above).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 103 of 218


Options (IFD GUI) or F2 (IFD) – Click/press to make changes to options
available for the backup. Enable the Save as default option before selecting
OK to save the options as the defaults for future backups.

Only options specific to Simple Operations mode are listed here. For details on
the other options refer to Understanding Backup Options on page 47.

Manually Select Target – Enable to have Image for DOS prompt you to select
where you want to save the backup even if a backup store already exists. (You
will always be prompted to select a store if more than one exists.)

Restoring a Backup
1. Select Restore a backup to this computer on the main window and click Next.

2. Select the backup you wish to restore and then click Next.

Check the Select Target Drive Manually option if you wish to select the drive
yourself instead of having the original drive automatically selected. You will be
prompted to make your selection in the next step.

Description (IFD GUI) or F1 (IFD) – Click/press to view the description for the
selected backup.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 104 of 218


If the Allow file deletion on Restore & Validate file list option is enabled in
Settings, you can delete a backup (along with backups that depend on the
selected backup) by pressing Delete. Important: Be careful you don't delete
backup files that have data you need and pay attention to the files that will be
deleted in the list that will be presented to you. If you delete a backup file that
has other files depending on it, such as incremental backups, not only will the
file you selected be deleted but also all the files that depend on it.

3. If existing partitions will be replaced by the restore a warning will appear


showing the drive and partitions affected. Click Yes to continue if everything
looks correct.

4. The summary screen is shown. Click Start to run the restore.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to perform the operation. When using
IFD GUI, you can save the command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file
that runs Image for DOS by clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking
OK. The command line can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file.
To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command option
(above).

Options (IFD GUI) or F2 (IFD) – Click/press to make changes to options


available for the restore. Enable the Save options as default option before
clicking OK to save the options as the defaults for future restores.

For details on these options refer to Understanding Restore Options for an


Entire Drive on page 77.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 105 of 218


Validating a Backup
1. Select Validate a previous backup to check its integrity on the main window
and click Next.

2. Select the backup you wish to validate and then click Next.

Description (IFD GUI) or F1 (IFD) – Click/press to view the description for the
selected backup.

If the Allow file deletion on Restore & Validate file list option is enabled in
Settings, you can delete a backup (along with backups that depend on the
selected backup) by pressing Delete. Important: Be careful you don't delete
backup files that have data you need and pay attention to the files that will be
deleted in the list that will be presented to you. If you delete a backup file that
has other files depending on it, such as incremental backups, not only will the
file you selected be deleted but also all the files that depend on it.

3. The summary screen is shown. Click Start to run the validation.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to perform the operation. When using
IFD GUI, you can save the command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file
that runs Image for DOS by clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking
OK. The command line can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file.
To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command option
(above).

Copy a Hard Drive


1. Select Copy a hard drive to another hard drive on the main window and click
Next.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 106 of 218


2. Select the hard drive to copy and then click Next.

Clicking the Information button will show details about the selected drive,
including a list of the partitions.

Click the Compact button (press F3 with console version) to compact


FAT/FAT32 and NTFS partitions on the drive. This option allows you to reduce
the size required for a copy. You will be prompted to confirm the compaction
and then asked for the compaction value (size in MiB). For example, if you have
a 480GB drive that contains 50GB of data and requires 150GB of space to
restore and you need to copy it to a 128GB drive, you can compact the drive to
under 128GB before copying it to the 128GB drive.

3. Select the drive you want to copy to and click Next.

4. If the selected destination drive is not large enough, but the source data can be
compacted to fit, a warning will appear. Click Yes to continue and compact the
source data or No to select a different drive.

5. If the selected destination drive has existing partitions a warning will appear
showing the drive and the partitions that will be deleted. Click Yes to continue if
everything looks correct.

6. The summary screen is shown. Click Start to copy the drive.

Show Command (IFD GUI) or F6 (IFD) – Click/press to display the command


line you would type at a command prompt to perform the operation. When using
IFD GUI, you can save the command line to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file
that runs Image for DOS by clicking the Save to File checkbox and then clicking
OK. The command line can be edited before being saved.

Save Command (IFD) F8 – Press to open a window where you can edit the
command line (if desired) and then save it to a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file.
To save the command line using IFD GUI, use the Show Command option
(above).

Options (IFD GUI) or F2 (IFD) – Click/press to make changes to options


available for the copy operation. Enable the Save options as default option
before clicking OK to save the options as the defaults for future copy operations.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 107 of 218


For details on these options refer to Understanding Copy Options on page 97.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 108 of 218


Installing Image for DOS Manually
If you use an operating system platform other than Windows or if you wish to
control the contents of the bootable media that you create, you can follow these
steps to create a bootable media that contains Image for DOS.

1. Extract the contents of the Image for DOS ZIP archive file to a folder of your
choice.

Note: If you are using a version of Windows that has a built-in compressed
folders feature (e.g. Windows Me, XP, or later), you can double click the ZIP file
and then use the Extract all files link shown in the left pane of Windows
Explorer (or in the File menu) to extract the contents.

2. Create one of the following:

* A bootable DOS floppy diskette, using the instructions provided in the next
section or using the distribution available from the FreeDOS site.

* A bootable CD/DVD compilation, using the CD/DVD authoring software of


your choice.

3. Copy the files IMAGE.EXE and CDBOOT.F35 from the folder of Step 1 to the
bootable DOS floppy diskette, or the bootable CD/DVD compilation.

Note: If you are using the GUI version of Image for DOS you also need to copy
the bootitbm.dat or ifd.dat file. To copy any custom settings or license
information, also copy the bootitbm.ini or ifd.ini file.

* The bootable floppy diskette or CD/DVD disc can now be used to boot from
and run Image for DOS.

* If you are creating a bootable CD/DVD, proceed with the creation of the
bootable disc at this point.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 109 of 218


Creating a DOS Boot Diskette from Windows 95/98/Me
1. Insert a floppy diskette to format.

2. Click Start, then Settings, then Control Panel.

3. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

4. Click on the Startup Disk tab.

5. Click the Create Disk button.

Creating a DOS Boot Diskette from Windows XP/Vista


1. Insert a floppy diskette to format.

2. Click Start and select My Computer.

3. Right-click the A: drive and select Format.

4. Check the box next to Create an MS-DOS startup disk.

5. Click Start.

Starting Image for DOS Automatically Upon Boot


To have Image for DOS run automatically when booting from diskette, use a text
editor such as Notepad to create a file with only one line in it, as follows:

IMAGE.EXE

Save this file using the name AUTOEXEC.BAT and place it on your floppy disk.

Note: If your diskette already has an AUTOEXEC.BAT file on it, use Notepad to
open the AUTOEXEC.BAT file, start a new blank line at the end of the file, and
add the line above.

Automatically Running Image for DOS from Windows 95/98


You can run Image for DOS automatically from Windows 95/98. After you download
the Image for DOS ZIP archive and extract its contents as described previously,
you can create a shortcut on your Windows Desktop. Right-click IMAGE.EXE and
click Send To. On the menu that appears, click Desktop (Create Shortcut).

On your Windows Desktop, right-click the shortcut and follow these steps:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 110 of 218


1. Click Properties to display the Properties dialog box.

2. Click the Program tab.

3. Click the Advanced button.

4. Check MS-DOS Mode check box.

5. Click OK until you return to the Windows Desktop.

You can now double-click the shortcut to run Image for DOS.

Creating a Network Boot Diskette


If you are using Windows NT 4 Server, use the Network Client Administrator under
Administrative Tools to create a network boot diskette.

If you don’t have Windows NT 4 Server, you can download DSK3-1.EXE and
DSK3-2.EXE from the Microsoft ftp site to obtain the Microsoft Network Client for
MS-DOS (ftp://ftp.microsoft.com/bussys/clients/MSCLIENT/) to create your own
network boot diskettes. You may have to search for a DOS driver for your network
card.

You may want to also consider using a boot disk found at


https://www.netbootdisk.com/. This disk is easy to set up, and you’ll find quite a few
DOS drivers available here.

If you experience very slow network speeds, try using the IOBS=A environment
variable, as explained later in this document.

Customizing CDBOOT.F35
As long as CDBOOT.INS points to CDBOOT.F35 and CDBOOT.F35 is in the current
directory, Image for DOS will create a bootable CD/DVD/BD when creating a
backup image and storing it on CD/DVD/BD discs. However, the bootable disc
Image for DOS creates will restore only from an ATAPI CD/DVD/BD drive on one of
the IDE controllers or SATA controllers in ATA mode or combination PATA/SATA
mode. If you would like to restore from another device, you will need to create your
own bootable diskette with the appropriate ASPI drivers and AUTOEXEC.BAT file to
restore the image.

Used primarily by OEM vendors, IT shops, and advanced users, CDBOOT.INS and
CDBOOT.F35 are files you can use to customize the content and configuration of
bootable CD/DVD discs created by Image for DOS. By customizing CDBOOT.INS,
you can create a bootable CD/DVD disc that runs MS-DOS, FreeDOS, or your own
batch file(s). For example, you can create a batch file that runs Image for DOS and
automatically restores an image stored on the bootable disc.

The default copy of CDBOOT.INS included with Image for DOS is configured to use
CDBOOT.F35.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 111 of 218


CDBOOT.INS is a plain text file. You separate parameters using commas, and the
required parameters are:

* Source File – Relative path to the source boot file.

* Target File – Relative path and file name to be assigned to the boot file once it
is copied to disc by Image for DOS. If this parameter is omitted, the boot file will
be placed in the root of the disc and will retain the source file name.

* Cache Code – If set to C, the boot file contents will be cached in memory. If
omitted (or set to anything other than C), it will be read from the disc.

* Emulation Code – Type of emulation to be used for the boot file, according to El
Torito standard:

0 – No emulation

1 – 1.2-MB Floppy diskette emulation

2 – 1.44-MB Floppy diskette emulation

3 – 2.88-MB Floppy diskette emulation

4 – Hard drive emulation

* Load Sectors – Number of virtual/emulated sectors to load at boot.

* File System Type – Partition file system ID.

* Load Segment – Segment to load boot.

* System type for boot catalog:

0x00 – Normal

0xEF – UEFI

Each boot file specification must go on its own line, and at least one line with a non-
zero Load Sectors value is required. If you supply more than one boot file
specification with a non-zero Load Sectors value, only the first one will be used,
and any others will simply be copied to the disc.

The default content of CDBOOT.INS is:

CDBOOT.F35,,C,2,1

Using this default configuration, Image for DOS will:

* Look for CDBOOT.F35 in the current directory.

* Place the boot file in the root directory of the disc, with the name CDBOOT.F35.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 112 of 218


* Cache the boot file in memory.

* Use 1.44-MB floppy emulation.

* Load one emulated sector.

* Use the default file system type.

* Use the default load segment.

* Use the normal (non-UEFI) system type for boot catalog.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 113 of 218


Deploying Your Image
When you deploy an image, you restore it to a number of computers in an
organization. Therefore, the information in this section does not apply to most home
users.

Image for DOS does not change the SID of Windows systems. If you are using
Image for DOS for deployment purposes and want to change the SID for Windows
you should use the MS Sysprep utility.

You may want to set up the base machine so that the last partition ends at one
track less than the actual end of the hard drive (around 8 MB less) to leave room for
different brands or models of the same size hard drive.

See the following links for more information on how to prepare for the deployment
of Windows:

Windows 10

Deploy Windows 10

Deploy Windows 10 with MDT / Configuration Manager

Windows 8.x

Install, Deploy, and Migrate to Windows 8

Sysprep (System Preparation) Overview

Windows 7

Deliver and Deploy Windows 7

Windows 7 Desktop Deployment Overview

You might also want to reference the following Terabyte KB article:

Can I Use the Images for Deployment Purposes?

Image for DOS User Manual Page 114 of 218


Image for DOS Advanced Configuration Options
Image for DOS offers a number of advanced configuration options. You can set
these options in a user-created IFD.INI file or using environment variables that
you include on the command line or in a batch file. The way you run Image for DOS
affects the way Image for DOS processes advanced options.

If you run Image for DOS using the menu interface as described earlier in this
manual, Image for DOS sets all options using IFD.INI, and you can customize
IFD.INI. If you also want to set environment variables, store them in a batch file
that you run prior to running Image for DOS.

If you run Image for DOS from the command line as described in the section,
“Running Image for DOS from the Command Line,” Image for DOS processes the
command line switches and uses IFD.INI to process global default options (but
ignores all other options in IFD.INI) and finally processes any environment
variables you set. So, environment variables take precedence over IFD.INI.

Image for DOS INI File


To apply settings to Image for DOS using the INI file, you create a text file named
IFD.INI, using a text editor such as Notepad. Image for DOS will look for
IFD.INI in the current directory only.

Settings you specify in IFD.INI need to be placed under a section name. For
details on the settings available, refer to Tables 1 to 10 in the section, “Running
Image for DOS from the Command Line.” A typical backup IFD.INI file might look
like this:

[Options]
SeqVolID=1
TimeZone=PST8PDT

[License]
ProductKey=nnnn-nnnn-nnnn

[BACKUP_DEFAULTS]
PostValidate=2

[HD0]
UseOrgGeo=1

Image for DOS Environment Variables


You use the SET command to establish Image for DOS environment variables. The
format for Image for DOS environment variables is:

SET IFD=option1:value;option2:value;option3:value

Image for DOS User Manual Page 115 of 218


All of the environment variables you can use with Image for DOS are set by using
the same options as you would use from the command line (not the INI options).
The command line options appear in the left column of Tables 1 to 10.

You can display a list of currently set environment variables from the command line
by typing the set command with no parameters. To remove an environment
variable, type the set command, the variable name, and an equal sign (=) followed
by no value. For example, to clear the IFD variable, type the following:

SET IFD=

Note: By default, Image for DOS will only pull global options from the IFD
environment variable. If you wish to also pull operation options from the variable
you will need to specify the /ue option before the operation parameter. For example,
if creating a backup: image /ue /b …

Image for DOS File Path Variables


You use a set of special variables in the image file name path. The variables are
inserted in the file name path by using a special format of $~variablename$. If data
for the variable is not available it will be blank/empty.

The available variable names are categorized below:

Date/Time:

YYYY – four digit year


YY – two digit year
MM – two digit month
DD – two digit day of month
DOY – three digit day of year
DOW – three character day of week
HHMM – four digit hours and minutes
HHMMSS – six digit hours, minutes, and seconds

Disk:

DSIG – disk signature


DSN – disk serial number
DSS – disk sector size
DTS – disk total sectors
DG – disk GUID
DN – disk Number

Partition:

PSLBA – partition starting LBA


PELBA – partition ending LBA
PGT – partition GUID type
PG – partition GUID

Image for DOS User Manual Page 116 of 218


PID – partition ID
PFSID – partition file system ID
PME – partition MBR entry number
PN – partition name (label)
PDL – partition drive letter

The partition variables can include a number suffix (beginning with 0) to indicate the
index of the partition. If no index is specified the first included partition is used. For
entire disk images, the partitions are indexed in the same order as those on the
disk. For multi-partition images, the index number is the index of the partition as
specified for the backup and not necessarily the index of the partition on the disk.
For example, if you include partitions 0x2 and 0x4 (e.g. /d:b3@0x2,0x4) in the
backup, you would specify the labels as part of the file name by using $~PN0$ and
$~PN1$.

Note: When creating entire disk images, extended partition containers are not
indexed and not available using the partition variables (the partition is skipped and
the index continues with the volumes it contains).

Misc.:

VER – program version

Examples:

The following variables would embed the 4-digit year, 2-digit month, and 2-digit day
in the image file name:

“Backup on $~YYYY$-$~MM$-$~DD$”

Create the file name using the disk signature and partition labels of the first two
partitions:

“Backup for Disk $~DSIG$-$~PN0$-$~PN1$”

Image for DOS User Manual Page 117 of 218


Running Image for DOS from the Command Line
You can run Image for DOS (IMAGE.EXE) from the command line. Be sure to
separate the command line options with spaces. For options that take values,
separate the value from the option with a colon (:) or a space (e.g. /f:filename
or /f filename). You can view general command line options by typing the
following command at the command prompt:

image /?

When using the console version, press Enter to advance through the screens.

When running Image for DOS from the command line, you might need to include
references to hard drive numbers and/or partition IDs. To determine the correct
hard drive number or partition ID, complete Steps 1 through 5 in the section
“Creating a Full Backup,” making sure that you select the hard drive whose number
and/or partition IDs you need to obtain. The hard drive number will then appear in
the format “HDn” (e.g. “HD0” or “HD1”). The partition ID appears in parenthesis in
the middle of each partition description and consists of either two or four characters.

Note: Under certain configurations, hard drive numbers may be different in DOS
than they are in Windows or other environments.

You can also view and save the command line for an operation directly from Image
for DOS. To do this, proceed normally through the steps of the desired operation
until you reach the options screen (just before the Summary screen). Click the
Show Command button (IFD GUI) or press F6 (IFD CUI) to display the information
you would type at a command prompt to start the operation with the options you
selected as you displayed the various screens in Image for DOS. You can use this
information to create a batch file or TBScript (.TBS) file that runs Image for DOS by
selecting the Save to File option. The command line can be edited before being
saved. (In IFD CUI use the Save Command option to save the command line to a
file.)

The basic format for running Image for DOS from the command line is:

image [action] [options]

Valid values for [action] are:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 118 of 218


B Backup

R Restore

Copy Copy

V Validate

L List partitions, optical drives, or file contents

Combine Combine incrementals with the base image

REBOOT Reboot System

When you specify command line options, you precede each option by typing the /
(slash) character.

For example, you might type the following at the command prompt to create a
backup using Image for DOS. The command specifies the source drive and
partition, the target drive and partition, and the backup filename.

IMAGE /b /d:0@0x01 /f:1@0x01:\mypath\filename

The first parameter, /b, identifies that you want to perform a backup.

The second parameter, /d:0, identifies the drive to back up. This example backs
up Hard Drive 0.

The next part of that parameter, @0x01, identifies the partition to back up on the
selected hard drive; this example backs up the first partition. If you want to back up
the entire drive, simply omit the part of the parameter that identifies the partition.

The third parameter, /f, identifies that you are about to specify where to store the
backup file. 1 identifies the target drive and @0x01 again identifies the partition; in
this example, Image for DOS will store the backup file on Hard Drive 1 in the
partition with ID 0x01. The information after @0x01 represents the path and file
name where you want to store the backup file. In this example, Image for DOS
stores the backup file in \mypath\filename.

To list partitions on a hard drive, you would type:

image /l /d:0

In this example, /d:0 identifies hard drive 0 as the drive for which you want to list
partitions.

In Table 1, you find the global parameters you can set for Image for DOS
regardless of the action you set (backup, restore, validate, or copy).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 119 of 218


Important Note: It’s highly recommended that all global and device options be set
before any other options. This is because certain command line options use
whatever global/device option is set at the time the parameter is handled.

Example using the /ue global option and /a2k device option when restoring:
image /ue /a2k /r /d:w0 /f:mybackup

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the parameter are available; in other cases, only one
is available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an
INI file, place these parameters in the [Options] section except as otherwise noted.

Table 1: Image for DOS Global Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/uvl:0 VolumeLabels=0
Instructs Image for DOS to display the string found in the partition table of the EMBR, if
possible, rather than volume labels.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will display volume labels, even if identifiers for
applicable partitions exist in the EMBR.

/seq SeqVolID=1
Instructs Image for DOS to assign ID numbers to volumes in sequential order rather than
random order.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will assign ID numbers to the volumes in random
order.

/cb:n CheckBoxes=n
Determines if check boxes are used for partition selection.
0 = No
1 = Yes
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses checkboxes.

/con N/A
Instructs Image for DOS to run in console (text-only) mode, rather than the CGUI
(character graphical user interface) mode.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS runs in CGUI mode.

/nocan NoCancel=1
Tells Image for DOS not to permit canceling the backup, restore, validate, or copy
operation once it has begun.
Default if omitted: You can cancel the current operation.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 120 of 218


/w7mbr:0 Win7MBR=0
Windows Vista and later tied the kernel loader to the MBR code such that using previous
MBR code may not allow Windows Vista or later to boot on certain machines. By
default, Image for DOS uses the code base compatible with Windows Vista or later. The
new MBR code will continue to boot older OSes with the exception of some (rare)
configurations using Win9x on FAT32.
Specify this option to have Image for DOS use Windows 9x compatible MBR code. Note
that the .ini file value is not used on command-line based operations.
Default if omitted: MBR code compatible with Vista/Windows 7 or later is used.

/vn:filename,cr,type,sizeinmb Vn=filename,cr,type,sizeinmb
Makes a virtual drive available for use by Image for DOS. n is a number between 0 and
9 you use to represent any of 10 virtual drives. If you reuse a number, Image for DOS
will replace the prior definition for that virtual drive.
You must define the virtual device before using it with other command line parameters
using one of two formats:
a) Just include the filename of an existing virtual drive.
Example: /v0:"D:\VHD Files\myvirtualdisk.vhd"
b) Provide additional parameters after the filename using commas as shown in the
sample above and the following example:
/v2:myvirtualdisk.vmdk,r,vmdks,2048
For the cr parameter, use the letter C or the letter R:
C Tells Image for DOS to create a new virtual drive if one doesn’t exist.
R Tells Image for DOS to recreate the virtual drive even if one already
exists. Note that Image for DOS gives no warning before recreating a
virtual drive.
For the type parameter, the following values are supported:
raw A plain raw file that is allocated as the virtual drive
vhdd VirtualPC Dynamic Expanding file
vhdf VirtualPC Fixed file
vhdxd Hyper-V Virtual Hard Disk Dynamic Expanding file*
vhdxf Hyper-V Virtual Hard Disk Fixed file*
vhdxd4 Hyper-V Virtual Hard Disk Dynamic Expanding file with a
sector size of 4KiB (4096 bytes)*
vhdxf4 Hyper-V Virtual Hard Disk Fixed file with a sector size of
4KiB (4096 bytes)*
vmdk VMWare Monolithic Sparse IDE file
vmdks VMWare Monolithic Sparse SCSI file
*For Windows caching reasons, it is highly recommended to create partitions within a
VHDX file that are aligned on at least a 1MiB boundary. That is either 2048 sectors for

Image for DOS User Manual Page 121 of 218


512 byte sized sectors or 256 sectors for 4096 byte sized sectors.
You can use a special form of the command line parameter (/v0:) to remove all
references to any defined virtual drives. This special format is useful when you want to
override any Vn= references that may exist in an .INI file.
Default if omitted: No virtual drives are defined.

/ivdfs IgnoreVirtDevFileSize=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS ignore the safety check on ensuring the virtual
drive (/v0, etc.) is aligned on the smallest sector size of 512 bytes.
Default if omitted: The safety check will be performed.

/kfb KeepFailedBackups=1
Prevents Image for DOS from deleting the backup created when the backup operation
fails.
Default if omitted: The backup created is deleted if the backup failed.

/recover
Attempts to access image files that are reported as incomplete and suppresses the data
loss message/clearing of boot sector data on a failed validation during restore. If you
obtain an “ABORT: Data corruption was encountered” or “FAIL: Data did not pass
validation” error message using this option the restored file system should not be
trusted. You should attempt to obtain the files you need (which may not be valid) then
reformat the partition or restore a good image.
Default if omitted: An incomplete image is reported when opened and boot sector data is
cleared on a restore that fails.

/logfile:"x:\path to\logfile.txt" LogFile=x:\path to\logfile.txt


Use this parameter to specify the path and filename of the log file. x is a drive letter, path
is the desired path, logfile (or log file) is the name of the log file, and txt is the file
extension of the log file. Image for DOS doesn’t automatically add a file extension. When
using the command line option (/logfile), if you use paths and/or filenames with
imbedded spaces, enclose them in quotation marks.
The folder you specify for the log file must exist prior to performing an applicable
operation in Image for DOS. If the path does not exist, Image for DOS will not create the
specified log file.
Default if omitted: If logging has not been disabled with /log:0, a log named IFD.LOG is
created in the current directory of the operating environment.

/logmax:n LogMaxSize=n
Ensures the log file doesn't grow beyond the size n given. Once n is reached the data
from the top of the file is purged. Because of this, you typically don't want a large n
value. n can be bytes, KiB, or MiB. Decimal values (e.g. 2.5MiB) are supported.
For example: /logmax:32768 or /logmax:32KiB

Image for DOS User Manual Page 122 of 218


Note: If you specify a size smaller than the current log file size, the new size will not take
effect until the log is written to or Image for DOS is closed.
Default if omitted: There is a 1MiB size limit on the log file.

/logl:n LogLevel=n
Causes less or more information to be output to the log file. The standard log levels are
as follows (additional levels may be used by support, if necessary).
0x1 – Error messages only
0x2 – Include warning messages
0x3 – Include status messages
0x4 – Include information messages
0x9 – Include debugging information
Value can be in either hex or decimal format. To have the log flushed to disk with each
entry, add 0x8000 (32768) to the desired above value.
Examples:
To specify status level logging: /logl:0x3
To specify information level logging with flush: /logl:0x8004
Note: The /email option will be ignored (emails will not be sent) if the option to flush is
enabled for the operation.
Default if omitted: Informational level logging is performed.

/ctf CreateTagFiles=1
Use this option to cause a file named #TBTAG# in the root of any copied or restored
partition with information about what program was used and when it was restored or
copied. Note that if this option was enabled during a restore or copy then later backed
up and restored with tagging disabled, the old tag file remains on the partition. In other
words, with this option off, it doesn't delete tag files on restored or copied partitions.
Default if omitted: No tag file is created.

/of:n OFlags=n
This option allows setting the following special bit oriented options. Multiple options can
be specified by adding values together. (Other option values than those listed here
should not be used unless instructed by support to do so.)
0x8 Setting this option will cause single partition and multiple
partition backups created to have the "Restore First Track"
and "Write Standard MBR Code" options restricted upon
restoring. This is not an option for normal use.
0x200 Setting this option will pad file extensions for .tbi file splits to
three digits (.001, .002, ..., .012, etc.).

Default if omitted: None of the special options are set.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 123 of 218


/exo ExtOpen=1
Tells Image for DOS to try using the Extended DOS Open function. The Extended DOS
Open function allows DOS to work with files up to 4GiB instead of 2GiB, however it is not
supported correctly in all the DOS versions nor when accessing network drives.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not use the Extended DOS Open function.

/lowmem LowMem=1
Tells Image for DOS to use smaller buffers. This allows use of Image for DOS in a
system with as low as 4MiB of RAM provided the "File (OS)" option is used for accessing
the image file. Otherwise 16MiB+ is still required.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will require 16MiB or more of memory.

/relax:n RelaxedMatching=n
Use this option when performing a differential or incremental backup to instruct Image
for DOS to relax some of the criteria it uses to determine the drive you used as the
source during the corresponding full backup. This option has no effect during full backup
operations. Use one of the following values in place of n:
1 – Enable relaxed criteria. Disk signature must match.
2 – Enable relaxed criteria and also ignore the disk signature.
Note: Specifying /relax is equivalent to /relax:1
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not relax the criteria it uses to detect the full
backup source drive.

/rfsid RelaxFSID=1
In cases where a partition’s file system (formatting) does not match its file system ID
(partition type) setting, this option can be used to relax this check and allow the file
system to be determined from the partition itself. For supported file systems, this allows
these types of partitions to be shown normally with their volume labels, used space, etc.
as well as allowing backing up used sectors (instead of all partition sectors) and resizing
when restoring.
Note that the invalid file system ID value will be retained when the partition is restored (it
will not be corrected). Additionally, if this option is used to create a backup of a partition
with an invalid file system ID, resizing the partition when restoring will not be possible
unless the option is also used for the restore.
Default if omitted: The default method will be used to determine partition file systems.

/quit N/A
Use this option to cancel any operation before it occurs. Anything prior to the operation
beginning still occurs. This is useful for processing a global command line option without
bringing up the user interface. Image for DOS will return 1 if no error. Otherwise, an error
code for the failure will be returned.
Default if omitted: The operation is not canceled.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 124 of 218


/po:n PerfOpt=n
This option is used to manually control various file IO options of Image for DOS. The
settings can have an impact on the overall performance. The values for n can be as
follows and combined using addition:
32 Use smallest alignment

Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the values as it sees fit.

/bgp BGProgress=1
Use this option to enable updating the progress and elapsed time in the background.
When you enable background updating, Image for DOS can update the elapsed time
even if the program is waiting for a device to respond.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS updates the progress and elapsed time directly, rather
than in the background. (This is the default behavior because some systems lock up
when background updating is enabled.)

/npata NoPATA=1
Use this option to prevent Image for DOS from directly accessing PATA controllers.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS can access PATA controllers.

/nsata NoSATA=1
Use this option to prevent Image for DOS from directly accessing SATA controllers.
Use this option if you are experiencing system hangs or drive access problems when
using Image for DOS. These issues arise when Image for DOS cannot match a SATA
drive to a BIOS drive and defaults to using the BIOS drive. When Image for DOS
accesses the BIOS drive, the BIOS will hang the system until it times out (if ever). While
the ShareSATA=1 option (as explained below) would allow a BIOS to share the devices,
you might still find it necessary to use this option to disable low level SATA support
altogether. Disabling this option only affects access of SATA CD/DVD drives; the hard
drives would continue to be accessible via the BIOS.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS can access SATA controllers directly.

/ssata ShareSATA=n
This option determines how Image for DOS uses the SATA AHCI controller. The valid
values for n are:
0 – Image for DOS takes control of the controller.
1 – Image for DOS employs a minimally evasive method of accessing the controller.
2 – Command Line Only – Use method one but do not force BIOS (direct).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS takes control of the controller.

/sataign:n SATAIgnoreMask=n

Image for DOS User Manual Page 125 of 218


Use this option to prevent access to certain SATA AHCI host controllers. To ignore the
first SATA controller, use /sataign:1, and to hide the second SATA controller, use
/sataign:2. To hide the third SATA controller, use /sataign:4. To hide both the first and
second SATA controllers, use /sataign:3.
Note: Use a basic Bit Mask numbering scheme.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS takes control of all SATA AHCI host controllers.

/cata:0 CheckATA=0
Instructs Image for DOS to honor the BIOS interface and not check the ATA interface
even if the BIOS reports a drive as being a SATA device instead of ATA.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS checks the ATA interface even when the BIOS reports
the drive as SATA.

/csata:0 CheckSATA=0
Instructs Image for DOS to honor the BIOS interface and not check the SATA interface
even if the BIOS reports a drive as being an ATA device instead of SATA.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS checks the SATA interface even when the BIOS
reports the drive as ATA.

/bmbrm:0 BIOSMBRM=0
Use this option to disable the special matching routine Image for DOS will use if the
system BIOS doesn’t provide a method for Image for DOS to match SATA drives to
BIOS drives. This option is only useful if SATA support is enabled.
Default if omitted: A special matching routine is used when needed.

/atapidma:n AtapiDMA=n
Use this option to have Image for DOS use a higher performance method of accessing
ATAPI devices. Examples of ATAPI-type devices include CD and DVD drives. The
assigned value (n) determines the controller to which this setting applies:
1 – PATA
2 – SATA
3 – Both PATA and SATA
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses an older, yet more compatible, method of
accessing ATAPI devices.

/pataq:n PATAIRQ=n
Use this option to control drive IRQ options. It may be useful if you find that the BIOS
option of accessing (PATA) hard drives hangs after using BIOS (direct) or CD/DVD
drives. The value of n is a bitmask which has the following meanings:
0 – No change
1 – Disable device IRQ Generation when IFD starts command
2 – Enable device IRQ Generation when IFD starts command
4 – Disable device IRQ Generation when IFD completes command

Image for DOS User Manual Page 126 of 218


8 – Enable device IRQ Generation when IFD completes command
Valid combinations: 0, 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10.
Useful combinations: 6 or 9
Default if omitted: No change.

/biosata BIOSATA=1
If you don’t supply any modifier for the hard drive via the command line, this option tells
Image for DOS to use the BIOS (Direct) access method. In this mode, Image for DOS
detects the source and target drives using the system BIOS, but then Image for DOS
bypasses the BIOS and accesses them directly. Using this option might improve
performance on some systems.
Default if omitted: If you don’t supply any modifier for the hard drive, Image for DOS
uses the BIOS access mode, which permits the system bios to both detect and access
the source and target drives.

/tz:AAAnBBB TimeZone=AAAnBBB
This option sets the time zone that Image for DOS uses. When you save images to
NTFS partitions or CD/DVD discs, using the correct time zone will ensure that the
date/time stamps of the image files will be correct when they are viewed within Windows.
AAA and BBB are three letters you supply to represent the time zone. The characters
don’t mean anything to Image for DOS and are for your use.
n is a number that indicates the offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time), and may
be either positive or negative.
For example, you might use a time zone setting such as PST8PDT or EST5EDT.
Please refer to https://kb.terabyteunlimited.com/kb-articles/how-to-set-a-time-zone-for-
image-for-dos/ for more information.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not establish a time zone.

/usblio USBLIO=1
Using this option might help in cases where you experience lockups with certain USB
2.0 devices. This option can degrade USB IO performance.
Default if omitted: This option is disabled.

/usbco:n USBCO=n
Using this option might help in cases where you experience lockups with certain USB
2.0 devices. The possible values for n are 0, 1, 2, 3, and 4. To help prevent lockups
with a USB device, use the value 4. For example, /usbco:4.
Default if omitted: The option is enabled as USBCO=1.

/usbcot:n USBCOT=n
When using /usbco:4 this option sets the additional wait time used by that option. The
value is given in microseconds.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 127 of 218


Default if omitted: The option is set as USBCOT=25.

/usbeasd:n USBEASD=n
When using /usbco:1 this option sets the internal delay loop used in microseconds.
Default if omitted: The option is set as USBEASD=1.

/usbign:n USBIgnoreMask=n
Use this option to hide certain USB host controllers. For example, if you have a USB
keyboard, Image for DOS might disable the keyboard when it takes control of the USB2
host controller. Using this option, you can hide the host controller of that USB keyboard
and attach the USB keyboard to a different controller. It usually takes some
experimentation to determine which controller to hide, but the two USB ports next to
each other are usually controlled by the same host controller. To hide the first USB
controller, use /usbign:1, and to hide the second USB controller, use /usbign:2. To hide
the third USB controller, use /usbign:4. To hide both the first and second USB
controllers, use /usbign:3.
Note: Use a basic Bit Mask numbering scheme.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS takes control of all detected USB2 host controllers.

/cbs:0 ClearBootStatus=0
Use this option to prevent Image for DOS from forcing Windows to assume a clean
shutdown on Windows 2008 R2/Vista and Windows 7/8.x/10. This applies to copy and
restore only.
Default if omitted: Windows 2008 R2/Vista and Windows 7/8.x/10 boot status is cleared.

/phc:n PageHiberClear=n
This option is used to control how the default page file (pagefile.sys), swap file
(swapfile.sys), and hibernation file (hiberfil.sys) are treated after being restored
or copied when they have been omitted from the backup/copy. The values are bit based
and can be one of the following values or a combination of the following values added
together:
1 – Clear first 4096 bytes of the page file.
2 – Truncate page file to zero.
4 – Clear 8192 bytes of hibernation file.
8 – Truncate hibernation file to zero.
16 – Clear the first 4096 bytes of the swap file.
32 – Truncate swapfile.sys to zero.
For example, to truncate the page file and clear the first 8192 bytes of the
hibernation file, use 6.
Default if omitted: The first 4096 bytes of the page file and swap file are cleared and the
first 8192 bytes of the hibernation file is cleared.

/msg:"my message" Message=my message


Use this option to specify the text Image for DOS displays on the top of the screen while

Image for DOS User Manual Page 128 of 218


backing up, restoring, validating, or copying. The maximum length of the message text
depends on the command line length limit of the operating system. When using the
command line option (/msg), if your message text contains spaces, place the message
text in quotation marks:
/msg:"my message"
Use \n to force a new line; otherwise, text wraps to screen width only:
/msg:"first line\nsecond line"
Use {desc} to use the image description as the message:
/msg:"{desc}"
Note: Image for DOS (GUI) will ignore this parameter.
Default if omitted: No message text is displayed.

/uggs:0 UseGlobalGeoSettings=0
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter to disable the use of the global geometry settings for this individual
drive. This applies to interactive use of global geometry settings.
Default if omitted: Global geometry settings apply to the drive.

/npt NoPartTable=0x10000
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to treat the selected drive as a drive that
doesn’t use a partition table. If you use this option on the command line, you must place
it before the /d option. It stays in effect until you disable it using /npt:0. You may want to
disable this option if you use additional options to select a device/partition such as the
/f:0@0x1:\filename option. Note that the .ini file value is not used on command-line
based operations.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS treats the selected drive as a drive that uses a partition
table.

/anpt AssumeNoPartTable=0x40000
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to treat the selected drive as a drive that
doesn’t use a partition table only if the first sector on the drive is all zeros. If you use this
option on the command line, you must place it before the device is specified. Note that
the .ini file value is not used on command-line based operations.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS treats the selected drive as a drive that uses a partition
table.

/nptrm NPTOptRemMedOnly=0x80000
Goes under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to apply the npt or anpt options on removable
media only. If you use this option on the command line, you must place it before the
device is specified. Note that the .ini file value is not used on command-line based

Image for DOS User Manual Page 129 of 218


operations.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS applies the npt or anpt option to all drives..

/geodis GlobalGeoDisable=1
Use this to disable the global geometry settings and revert to using program defaults or
drive specific overrides equivalent to versions prior to 2.52. This option only applies to
interactive sessions; it does not apply to command line restores.
Default if omitted: Global geometry options are not disabled.

/geoah GlobalGeoAlignHS=1
When this option is enabled Image for DOS will prevent problems with unaligned
partitions being restored to systems with BIOS Auto Mode enabled. Many newer
systems use auto mode by default, and some even don't have an option to turn it off.
This is equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align MBR Ending HS and Align
MBR HS when Truncated. This option only applies to interactive sessions; it does not
apply to command line restores. To disable use /geoah:0
Default if omitted: This option is enabled.

/geoa2k GlobalGeoAlign2K=1
This option provides a convenient way to enable 1MiB partition alignment for all drives
(drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors; drives with 4096 byte
sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors). This is popular with users of SSD type drives. It
is the equivalent to enabling the individual overrides Align on 1MiB Boundaries, Align
MBR Ending HS, Align MBR HS when Truncated, and disabling Align on End. This
option only applies to interactive sessions; it does not apply to command line restores.
Default if omitted: This option is disabled.

/geoav:n GlobalGeoAlignVal=n
This option allows you to specify a custom partition alignment value for all drives. For
example, to align partitions on 2MiB boundaries, use /geoav:2M or
GlobalGeoAlignVal=2M. Invalid sizes will be ignored. This option overrides the other
interactive alignment options. This option only applies to interactive sessions; it does not
apply to command line restores.
Default if omitted: This option is not set (a custom alignment value will not be used).

/geombr GlobalGeoMBRGeo=1
This option is used to prevent problems where users restore an image from another
system to a drive that will be put back in the other system. For example, the hard drive
from PC-A is backed up; PC-B is used to restore to a new hard; that new drive is placed
back in PC-A. Without this option enabled, Image for DOS would setup the partition to
properly boot on the hard drive for PC-B which can sometimes (not always) be a
problem when the hard drive is going back to PC-A. This option solves that and is
equivalent to the individual Use MBR Geometry override. This option only applies to
interactive sessions; it does not apply to command line restores.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 130 of 218


Default if omitted: This option is disabled.

/geombrv GlobalGeoMBRGeoValidate=1
This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is
aligned to known standards before accepting it for use. It only applies when /gemombr
(GlobalGeoMBRGeo) is enabled. This option only applies to interactive sessions; it
does not apply to command line restores. To disable use /geombrv:0
Default if omitted: This option is enabled.

/geoorg GlobalGeoOrgGeo=1
This option is the global equivalent to the individual Use Original Geometry override.
This option only applies to interactive sessions; it does not apply to command line
restores.
Default if omitted: This option is disabled.

/nos:size NoScale=size
This option offers a way to prevent scaling of small partitions when scaling to a larger
drive. Partitions that are size (in bytes) or smaller will not be scaled. For example:
200m would not scale partitions that are 200MiB or smaller. Note that the .ini file value
is not used on command-line based operations.
Default if omitted: All partitions are scaled when scaling is used.

/uhci:1 UHCI=1
Enables supports for most built-in USB 1.1 controllers (typically found on older
computers).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not recognize UHCI USB1.1 controllers.

/rgd N/A
This option, which is positional and must follow an operation parameter command,
instructs Image for DOS to reset all global options to their defaults at the point it’s
specified. This provides a method for command lines to be consistent regardless of any
INI option settings.
For example, if restoring a backup: image /r /rgd /uy …
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not reset global defaults.

/ue N/A
This option instructs Image for DOS to pull both global and operation options from the
IFD environment variable. You must specify this option before the operation parameter
on the command line. For example, if creating a backup: image /ue /b …
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will only pull global options from the IFD environment
variable.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 131 of 218


/u N/A
Use this option to cause Image for DOS to not display the completion message on
success of the operation. A message will still be displayed if success with bad sectors or
an error occurred. This allows the rest of the user interactive prompts to continue to work
normally whereas with /uy or /un they would be auto-answered.
Default if omitted: The completion message will be displayed on success.

/un N/A
Use this parameter to perform an unattended backup and tell Image for DOS to assume
the answer to all Yes/No prompts is No and the answer to all OK/Cancel messages is
Cancel. Image for DOS then aborts the backup process when the first Yes/No prompt
appears.
Place this option just after the action parameter (/b /r /v) to ensure this parameter is in
effect for prompts that may occur in other command line options.
This option is disabled when additional media is needed (file not found) and /um is not
specified.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not run an unattended backup.

/uy N/A
Use this parameter to perform an unattended backup and tell Image for DOS to assume
the answer to all Yes/No prompts is Yes and the answer to all OK/Cancel messages is
OK.
Place this option just after the action parameter (/b /r /v) to ensure this parameter is in
effect for prompts that may occur in other command line options.
This option is disabled when additional media is needed (file not found) and /um is not
specified.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not run an unattended backup.

/ui N/A
Use this parameter when performing an unattended backup to tell Image for DOS to
assume the answer to all Abort/Retry/Ignore prompts is Ignore. Use this parameter in
conjunction with uy or un.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS assumes the answer to all Abort/Retry/Ignore prompts
is either Yes or No, depending on whether you set uy or un.

/um N/A
During an unattended backup using CD/DVD discs, use this parameter to tell Image for
DOS to ignore the first request for media. This option helps you start the backup if you
have already inserted a disc and a prompt appears asking for the disc. This option works
only for the first prompt—you need to respond to other prompts for media unless you
specify /uy or /un. If you combine /uy or /un with /um, then any additional disc requests
will cause the program to end with an error instead of prompting for the media.
For media other than CD/DVD discs or during a restore/validation, using this option

Image for DOS User Manual Page 132 of 218


allows the program to end with an error instead of prompting for the media.
Place this option just after the action parameter (/b /r /v) to ensure this parameter is in
effect for prompts that may occur in other command line options.
Default if omitted: Media change requests will disable the /uy or /un options and you will
be required to respond to the request.

/up N/A
Use this parameter when performing an unattended backup to tell Image for DOS to not
prompt for a password if one is needed and not provided or is provided and is incorrect.
Instead, the program will just exit with an error code.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will prompt for a password if one is needed.

/asr:0 AutoScaleRestrict=0
Use this option to prevent small partitions from being automatically scaled when
restoring or copying a full drive. All partitions will be scaled normally (per scaling option
selected) to fit the destination drive unless a minimum size is specified using the /nos
option.
Default if omitted: Partitions with a size of 15GiB or 1/8 the drive size (whichever is less)
or smaller will not be scaled when restoring a full drive image or copying a full drive. This
provides an automatic method to avoid scaling system reserved, recovery, and utility
partitions to larger sizes when upgrading to a larger drive.

/aubp:0 AutoUpdateBootPart=0
Use this option to prevent Image for DOS from automatically updating the boot partition
when a full drive image is restored or a drive is copied.
Default if omitted: The boot partition (including an EFI system partition) will automatically
be updated when a full drive image is restored or a drive is copied.

/sar:0 SearchOnAutoRestore=0
When performing an automatic restore, limits Image for DOS to using the drive number
of the backed up drive to determine the destination drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will search for the destination drive when performing
an automatic restore (virtual drives will not be searched). The search includes checking
the disk signature or GUID, drive size, and empty drives. If a match isn’t found the drive
number of the backed up drive will be used.

/odid OutputDiskID=1
Use this option to enable command line output and relevant log entries to use the Disk
ID (NT Signature or GUID) instead of drive numbers where the drive has an ID and the
ID is unique. Specifying the Disk ID instead of the drive number may be more stable
(especially for setup of scheduling backups) on systems where the drive order may
change.
Note: Disk ID based items are only supported on the default bus (bus/device modifiers

Image for DOS User Manual Page 133 of 218


are not supported).
Examples: image /b /d:#0xFD2C4742@0x1 /f:"E:\mybackup"
image /b /d:{88AA61DC-7D91-4369-97FF-770EAE169F25}@0x4 …
Default if omitted: Drive numbers will be used in command line output.

/ca CompletionAlarm=1
Use this option to enable an audible alarm upon completion of an operation, errors, or
when user interaction is required (insert media, etc.).
Default if omitted: The alarm will not be used.

/cr:0 CacheResize=0
Use this option to disable using a cache to reduce the time required to resize a partition.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use a cache to speed up resizing a partition.

/dwdl:0 DisableWinDL=0
Use this option to disable searching for Windows drive letters when using the Simple
Operations mode of Image for DOS. Drive letters will not be displayed when selecting a
drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will search for the drive letter mapping of the first
Windows installation found.

/eoo EjectOpticalOnly=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS only eject optical media. Other types of
removable media will not be ejected when another media is required. This option applies
only when the /noej (NoEject=1) option is not used.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will eject both optical and other removable media as
required.

/simple Simple=1
Use this option to enable the Simple Operations mode. Image for DOS will automatically
handle most options for you. For example, to back up a drive you simply choose which
physical drive you want to back up and, if needed, which drive you want to save to.
Backups are saved to a store on the destination drive (e.g. \TeraByte_TBI_Backups).
The storage area is maintained automatically with backups being deleted as needed
when space runs out.
Only Backup, Restore, Validate, and Copy operations are available in this mode. When
using the command line only backing up is supported.
To use Simple Operations mode when backing up from the command line, use the /d
parameter to specify the drive to back up and, optionally, use the /f parameter to specify
the storage drive path (must be root path and use direct access, not a drive letter). Do
not specify a base image or any filenames. To specify the maximum number of
incremental backups you want in each chain use the /mi parameter.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 134 of 218


Once a backup of a drive has been saved to a store it’s normally not necessary to
specify the store when later backups are run since the existing store will be located
automatically.
Note: Specifying unsupported parameters or values will cause Image for DOS to ignore
the Simple Operations mode request (Normal mode will be used).
Examples:
image /b /simple /d:b0 /f:b1@0x1:\
image /b /vb /simple /mi:3 /d:d1 /f:d2@0x2:\
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will function in Normal mode.

/mi:n MaxIncrementals=n
Use this option to specify the maximum number of incremental backups in each chain
when using Simple Operations mode (/simple). When the specified number is reached a
new chain will be started.
Note: When creating incremental backups remember to limit the chain length to a
reasonable number. Each backup in the chain requires additional resources to process
and adds another potential point of failure. It is not recommended to go over 30 and a
lower number is preferred.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS limits each chain to six incremental backups.

/asd AllowSimpleDelete=1
Use this option to allow deleting the files that are listed when selecting Restore or
Validate for Simple Operations mode. This option is off by default because the program
handles the lifetime of the files automatically and users should not be interfering with that
process (as well as not typically wanting to delete anything during a restore or validate
operation). However, there are times when deleting files may be necessary such as
when you get a new computer or removed a drive that will no longer be used. For
example, if you replace your computer, the new backups will be created in a folder that
is different than the original computer and the old backups will remain. When that
happens, you may not have enough space to create many, or any, new backups. In
order to free up storage space you will need to delete some of the old backups.
Important: Be careful you don't delete backup files that have data you need and pay
attention to the files that will be deleted in the list that will be presented to you. If you
delete a backup file that has other files depending on it, such as incremental backups,
not only will the file you selected be deleted but also all the files that depend on it.
Default if omitted: Backups cannot be deleted from the Simple Operations Restore &
Validate file lists.

/maxdss:n MaxDriveStoreSize=n
Specifies the maximum size the Simple Operations store on the drive should be. n can
specify bytes, mebibytes, gibibytes, or tebibytes (MiB/GiB/TiB). Do not place any spaces
between the number and the unit designation. The size is adjusted at the end of the
backup and only honored if two backup sets can remain (a minimum of two backup sets
must exist before any will be deleted). This means that additional space may be used

Image for DOS User Manual Page 135 of 218


while creating a backup. The /mi (MaxIncrementals) option controls how many
incrementals will be in each backup set.
For example, to specify a 100GiB store size: /maxdss:100GiB
Default if omitted: The Simple Operations storage area is maintained automatically with
backups being deleted as needed when space runs out.

/ict:n IncrementalChainThreshold=n
When creating an incremental backup, this option specifies the maximum number of
images that can exist in the chain before Image for DOS will warn you to consolidate the
chain or start a new one. The warning is displayed on the Summary screen and in the
log file.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will warn if the new incremental image depends on
more than 30 images.

/ddm DisableDepMatch=1
Use this option to disable searching for dependent image files when deleting images.
For example, if you have a full image and four incrementals and you select to delete the
full image, by default, Image for DOS will also delete the four incrementals since they
are dependent on the full being deleted. If this option is used, Image for DOS would just
delete the full image.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will search for dependent image files when deleting
images.

/ds DisableSettings=1
Use this option to disable access to global settings within the program. The Settings
button will be removed or the Settings key will be disabled (depending on the interface
used).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will allow normal access to global settings within the
program.

/iso8601 ISO8601=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS display the date and time using the ISO8601
format: YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm (24 hour time is used).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will display the date and time using the default format.

/bcl:n BackwardsCompatibleLevel=n
Use this option to specify the TBI file version to use when creating a backup using the
/bc (BackwardsCompatible) option. Valid values are 0 (version 2.50) and 278 – 332
(versions 2.78 through 3.32). Any value lower than 278 is considered 0.
Default if omitted: When /bc (BackwardsCompatible) is used, Image for DOS will create
the backup using the 2.50 TBI file version.

/iocf:0 IOCacheFlags=0

Image for DOS User Manual Page 136 of 218


Use this option to configure when to use small cache I/O for accessing the main image
files. The values are bit based and can be one of the following values or a combination
of the following values added together:
0 – Disabled
1 – Read File
2 – Write File
For example, to use a small cache for reading and writing the main image files, use the
value 3 (/iocf:3).
This option can be useful in cases where Image for DOS is slower than previous
versions or there are I/O errors due to too large an I/O request (e.g. buggy hardware).
Actual speed differences may be negligible and depend on the system being used.
Users accessing RAID 0 or RAID 5 drives may see a benefit from not using the small
cache (/iocf:0).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use 1 (a small cache will be used for reading the
main image files).

/fddc:n FDDevCache=n
Use this option to configure cache settings used for file direct access. Depending on the
system, enabling this option may decrease the time required to perform operations that
use file direct access. The values are bit based and can be one of the following values or
a combination of the following values added together (all values > 0 will enable device
cache):
0 – Disabled
1 – Enable Device cache
2 – Enable lazy writes
4 – Use larger cache
8 – Enable lazy write for small writes only
For example, to use lazy writes, use the value 2 (/fddc:2).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use 8 (device cache enabled, lazy write for small
writes enabled).

/tmbps:n ThrottleMbps=n
Use this option to throttle file output during a backup or consolidate operation. For
example, you can use this option to limit the throughput when saving the image file to a
network location. Valid values for n range from 0 (disabled) to 1000000 (1Tbps).
Examples:
/tmbps:10 /tsecs:1 /tintv:1
Sends up to 10Mbps as fast as possible.
/tmbps:10 /tsecs:1 /tintv:10
Send 10Mbps over 1 second, with 1/10th sent each 1/10th of a second.
/tmbps:10 /tsecs:2 /tintv:1
Send 20Mbps over 2 seconds as fast as possible.
/tmbps:10 /tsecs:2 /tintv:2

Image for DOS User Manual Page 137 of 218


Send 20Mbps over 2 seconds with ½ sent each 1 second (same as first example).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not throttle file output during a backup or
consolidate operation.

/tsecs:n ThrottleSeconds=n
Specifies the number of seconds over which to send the /tmbps value. Valid values for n
range from 1 to 1800 (30 minutes).
This option only applies if /tmbps (ThrottleMbps) is used. See /tmbps for examples.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use 1 for the option value.

/tintv:n ThrottleIntervals=n
Specifies the number of intervals for the /tsecs option. Valid values for n range from 1 to
1000.
This option only applies if /tmbps (ThrottleMbps) is used. See /tmbps for examples.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use 1 for the option value.

/csigut ChangeSigUseTarget=1
Use this option to retain the existing signature of the target disk when restoring or
copying a drive and /csig is used. For example, this is useful when scheduling a drive
copy where /csig is used and you need to specify the target disk by its signature (drive
number not used since it could change).
Default if omitted: When /csig is used the target disk signature will not be retained.

/utg UseTargetGUID=1
Use this option to retain the existing GUID of the target partition when restoring or
copying a partition and /csig is not used. For example, you may wish to update the
contents of an existing partition with the contents of another partition and retain the
existing GUID.
Default if omitted: The GUID of the existing target partition will be changed.

/stdout:filename N/A
Use this option to redirect program output that would normally be displayed in the
console to the specified file. For example:
image /l /d:0 /stdout:output.txt
The output from the /l operation will be saved to the file output.txt.
Default if omitted: Program output is displayed normally in the console.

/alm AutoLoadMedia=1
Use this option to allow Image for DOS to continue automatically after a removable
media change (CD/DVD, UFD, etc.). When a media change is required a prompt will be
displayed until the new media is detected, at which time the operation will continue (user
input is not required). If necessary, the operation can be canceled when the prompt is

Image for DOS User Manual Page 138 of 218


displayed by using the Cancel button.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will require user input to continue when it prompts for a
media change.

/cdf CDCloseOptions=1
You can use this option when saving images to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). Forces media
to be finalized when closed. No further writing to disc is allowed.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not finalize the disc when closed.

/vblba VolBPBLBA=1
Specify this option to use the actual LBA in a volume’s BPB instead of the L-LBA (LBA
offset from the EBR) of the volume.
Default if omitted: The volume’s L-LBA will be used in the volume’s BPB.

/wcoa WCOAvail=1
Assumes the /wco (WriteChangedSecsOnly) is okay to use when the device cannot be
communicated with.
Default if omitted: Assume /wco is not okay to use unless the drive reports otherwise.

/imdsf IgnoreMDSpecialFiles=1
Use this option to prevent special processing of certain files when using metadata.
Certain known files may be updated or changed without updates to the file’s metadata
and are considered changed regardless of the metadata. This option disables that
special processing which means the metadata is relied upon for changes.
Users can add user defined special files to consider changed regardless of the metadata
by using a section in the INI file named [mdspecialfiles]. The entries in the INI file
use the normal var=data layout; however, only the data is used to specify the files.
The var name to the left of the equals character must exist, but its name doesn't matter.
The files provided can include normal wildcard characters (* or ?). In addition, the path
can use the * wildcard to include any named subdirectory.
Example:
[mdspecialfiles]
File1=\Data\*
File2=\Users\*\Documents\Key*
File1 one will treat all files in the \Data directory as special. File2 will treat all files that
begin with “Key” in any user’s Documents folder as special.
Note: This option only applies to metadata operations.
Default if omitted: Special files are always considered changed if they exist.

/vba:n ValidateB4BAdjust=n
When enabled, if the source drive does not support DRAT (or equivalent) and the /vb
option (Validate Byte-for-Byte) is specified, it is changed to /v (normal validation) to

Image for DOS User Manual Page 139 of 218


prevent a byte-for-byte validation failure that would occur if the drive returned
inconsistent data.
Valid values for n are:
0 – Disable
1 – Enable for Simple Operations
2 – Enable for all
Default if omitted: Value 1 is used (enable for Simple Operations).

/mdudd MDUseDirData=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS look at the full contents of directories to calculate
the metadata hash. This can prevent validate byte-for-byte errors due to normal and safe
changes in the directory area, but requires more processing gathering information. When
creating the metadata hash it will be built in the mode indicated by this option. If you use
a hash file created in a different mode than the current setting, all directories are
considered changed (will be backed up or restored).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not look at the full contents of directories to
calculate the metadata hash.

/efdc:0 ExFileDevCache=0
Disables using a cache when processing exclude files. Use this option if the system runs
out of memory during the exclusion phase of a backup operation.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use a cache when processing exclude files.

/lvm:0 LVM=0
Disables processing used areas within an LVM. The LVM will be backed up in RAW
mode.
Default if omitted: Will only process used areas within an LVM where all logical volumes
are contained only within the LVM itself.

/usnrf:0 USNRollBackFix=0
Disables any attempt at notifying Windows Active Directory that the system has been
restored.
Default if omitted: Attempts to notify Windows Active Directory that the system has been
restored.

Image for DOS Backup Options


In Table 2, you find the command line options that you must set to use Image for
DOS to make a backup image.

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the parameter are available; in other cases, only one
is available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an
INI file, place these parameters in the [Backup_Defaults] section.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 140 of 218


Table 2: Image for DOS Required Backup Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/b N/A
Use this option to indicate that you want to perform a backup.
Also required: Either /d option to specify a full backup or /base option (for differential or
incremental backup) and the /f option to specify target image file destination.

/d N/A
Use when performing a full backup to identify the source hard drive and partition. For
most users, the partition ID will be a number from 1 through 4. For partition IDs of 9 or
below, you can use a single digit in place of hexadecimal notation (e.g. 1 is equivalent to
0x1, and 5 is equivalent to 0x5).
The volume ID will be a number formatted as 0xPVV, where P is the extended partition
and VV is the volume number in hexadecimal from 01 to FF.
If you are not sure what the partition or volume ID is, run Image for DOS using the
interface, choose the Backup option, and click Next. The screen that lists the partitions
and volumes also will display the ID in parentheses as a hexadecimal number. You
should prefix that number with a 0x on the command line.
/d:d@p d is the source hard drive number
/d:bd@p
p is the source partition or volume ID (hex
/d:ad@p
or decimal notation), depending on
/d:ud@p
whether you are referring to a partition or
/d:fd@p
a volume.
/d:sd@p
/d:od@p # – NT Disk Signature Follows
/d:#ntsig {GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
/d:{GUID}
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /d: and before the source
hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual drive
The /d option cannot be used with the
/base option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 141 of 218


/base N/A
Use when performing a differential or incremental backup to identify the backup on
which Image for DOS should base this backup.
/base:x:\bkup x:\ is source drive letter
/base:x:\mypath\bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup
/base:"x:\my path\bkup" bkup is name of existing backup (omit file
extension)
Or:
Or:
/base:d@p:\bkup
Specify source device, partition, path, and
/base:d@p:\mypath\bkup
file name:
/base:"d@p:\my path\bkup"
d is source hard drive number
/base:#ntsig@p:\mypath\bkup
p is source partition ID (hex or decimal
/base:{GUID}@p:\mypath\bkup notation)
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /base: and before the
source hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s)
v – Virtual drive
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.
The /base option cannot be used with the
/d option.

/f N/A

Image for DOS User Manual Page 142 of 218


Use this option to specify the target drive letter, path, and file name for a backup file.
/f:x:\filename x:\ is target drive letter
/f:x:\mypath\filename mypath or my path is path to filename
/f:”x:\my path\file name" filename is target file name for image
Or: Or:
/f:d@p:\filename Specify target device, partition, path, and
file name:
/f:d@p:\mypath\filename
d is target hard drive number
/f:"d@p:\my path\filename”
p is target partition ID (hex or decimal
/f:#ntsig@p:\mypath\filename
notation)
/f:{GUID}@p:\mypath\filename
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
mypath or my path is path to filename
filename is target file name for image
Device modifiers may be used as needed.
When used, they must be placed after the
/f: and before the target hard drive
number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s)
v – Virtual drive
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

The above options are required when you perform a backup using Image for DOS
from the command line. In Table 3, you find a list of the optional backup parameters
you can use when you run Image for DOS from the command line.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 143 of 218


The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the options are available; in other cases, only one is
available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an INI
file, place these parameters in the [Backup_Defaults] section for Normal mode
backups. If the parameter is available in Simple Operations mode, place it in the
[Simple_Backup_Defaults] section. Note: Some parameters may use a specific INI
file section other than those mentioned here.

Table 3: Image for DOS Optional Backup Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/pw:mypassword or /pw:"my password" N/A
Use this option to set a password for Image for DOS to use in conjunction with simple
password protection or AES encryption. If your password contains spaces, surround it
with quotation marks. Your password cannot exceed 128 characters and may contain
upper/lowercase letters, numbers, special characters, spaces, and non-ASCII
characters.
You must use this option if you also specify /enc:1 or /enc:3, described later in this
table.
This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain (base
+ differential/incrementals). The first password specified will be used for the newly
created image.
Default if both /pw and /opw are omitted: Image for DOS does not assign a password,
and the backup will be neither password protected nor encrypted.

/opw=n OPW=n
Specifies an obfuscated password to encrypt and/or password protect the backup image
being created. This option functions just like the /pw option except the password text is
obfuscated. From a security standpoint, it is not recommended to use an important
password (like a banking password) because the password is only obfuscated and not
encrypted.
If a password is specified when the backup options are saved as default an obfuscated
version of the password will be saved. The obfuscated password will also be used when
the command line for the operation is saved or exported (e.g. to a .bat file). Image files
created using an obfuscated password can still be accessed using the normal
unobfuscated passwords provided by the /pw parameter.
You must specify /enc:1 or /enc:3 along with this option as described later in this table.
This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain (base
+ differential/incrementals).
This option applies to both Normal and Simple Operations mode backups. The INI option
must be in the [Shared_Backup_Defaults] section and does not apply to command line
operations. If more than one password has been saved, the last one saved is the default
password used for new backups.
Default if both /pw and /opw are omitted: Image for DOS does not assign a password,
and the backup will be neither password protected nor encrypted.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 144 of 218


/sch:“path” N/A
Use this parameter to specify the search paths Image for DOS uses when looking for
base images in the backup chain. path can use the d@p:\path format to specify the drive
and partition id.
This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple search paths (e.g. when the
images in the backup chain are not all stored in the same folder).
Examples (commands should be on one line):
image /b /v /hash /base:"E:\Backups\Win8System - Inc C"
/f:"E:\Backups\Win8System - Inc D" /sch:"E:\Backups"
/sch:"E:\Backups\Archive"
image /b /v /hash /base:"b1@0x2:\Images\WinXP Drive - Inc D"
/f:"b1@0x2:\Images\WinXP Drive - Inc E" /sch:"b1@0x2:\Images"
/sch:"b1@0x2:\Images\Full"
Default if omitted: Image for DOS searches only the folder of the specified image for
base images in the backup chain.

/te TermEmulation=1
Instructs Image for DOS to terminate floppy emulation mode after booting from a CD or
DVD. This can help rectify certain compatibility issues caused by floppy emulation, but if
you use te, the virtual floppy diskette drive will be unavailable while Image for DOS is
running.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS doesn’t terminate BIOS (EL Torito) floppy emulation
mode.

/rb:n N/A
Use this option to specify what Image for DOS should do after completing the backup
operation. The value n can be one of the following:
0 – No reboot
1 – Reboot with all prompts
2 – Reboot with completion message, but without reboot message (error does not
cancel reboot)
4 – Reboot without completion message or reboot message (error cancels reboot)
8 – Shutdown
64 – Exit program
Default if omitted: Image for DOS attempts to determine if the computer needs to be
rebooted after completing the backup and, if so, prompts you to reboot.

/bc BackwardsCompatible=1
Current versions of Image for DOS may use a TBI format that is not compatible with
prior versions. Enable this option to have Image for DOS create the TBI file using a
format that is compatible with version 2.50. If desired, also use /bcl
(BackwardsCompatibleLevel) to specify a more current file version.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the current TBI format.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 145 of 218


/md MakeDir=1
This option causes Image for DOS to always create the target path if doesn't exist.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS doesn't attempt to create the target path.

/mp MultiPass=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use Multi Pass mode when creating a
differential or incremental backup. In Multi Pass mode, Image for DOS compares the
source partition against the full backup in one pass and performs the backup in a second
pass. This setting is not applicable when performing a full backup. This option must be
used if the applicable full backup resides on removable media.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses Single Pass mode, identifying changes and
backing up in one pass.

/cdws:n CDWriteSpeed=n
Use this setting to specify the maximum disc writing speed that Image for DOS will use
when burning to disc media (CD/DVD/BD) and force a lower writing speed than that
automatically used by the optical drive’s firmware. Slower writing speeds may increase
reliability.
n should be a positive integer (e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.).
The maximum writing speed that Image for DOS actually uses is determined by
whichever is lower: The /cdws:n value you specify or the speed deemed appropriate by
the drive’s firmware, according to the disc media in use. For example, if you are using
media that is rated at 8X for burning, the maximum writing speed will be no more than
8X, regardless of the setting you choose here. Similarly, if you supply a value that is
beyond or invalid for the drive’s design limits, the drive will automatically use the next-
highest speed supported by both the drive and the media in use.
DVD speeds are approximately 1/8 CD speeds, so if you are using DVD discs, multiply
the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use. For example, to obtain a maximum
burning speed of 2X with a DVD, use /cdws:16, since 8 × 2X = 16.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the Optimal speed setting.

/max:nMiB or /max:nGiB MaxFileSize=nMiB or MaxFileSize=nGiB


Use this setting to specify the maximum file size of the image files that Image for DOS
creates.
n should be a positive integer (e.g. 648, 698, 877, 1003, etc.). Image for DOS can use
either mebibytes or gibibytes, so you must specify either MiB or GiB, respectively. Do
not place any spaces between the number and the unit designation. Decimal values are
supported (e.g. 2.5GiB).
The maximum file size is ultimately dictated by the file system used on the target drive.
Also, some network redirectors limit file size to 2 GiB, which can be a limiting factor for
backup files stored on a network drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the maximum file size supported by the target file

Image for DOS User Manual Page 146 of 218


system.

/raw RawMode=1
Set this parameter to force Image for DOS to use raw mode, which backs up all sectors,
rather than just used sectors, even for recognized file systems.
For entire drive backups this option causes a raw sector by sector backup (and later
restore) of the entire drive without regard to any partitions or adjustments.
Note: This option is not applicable when creating a differential or incremental backup.
Instead, the new backup will use the setting as specified when the base image was
created.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS backs up only used sectors backed up for recognized
file systems and uses raw mode automatically for unrecognized file systems.

/skp:0 SkipPageFile=0
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to include the contents of the page files
(pagefile.sys, swapfile.sys) in the backup.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not include the contents of the page files in the
backup.

/skh:0 SkipHiberFile=0
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to include the contents of the hibernation
file (hiberfil.sys) in the backup.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not include the contents of the hibernation file in
the backup.

/skuj:0 SkipUsnJrnl=0
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to include the NTFS $UsnJrnl file in the
backup.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will omit the NTFS $UsnJrnl file from the backup.

/v PostValidate=1
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to perform a standard validation of the
image file(s) as part of the backup operation.
To set the INI value, use PostValidate=1
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not validate the backup image after creating it.

/vb PostValidate=2
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to perform a byte-for-byte validation of the
image file(s) as part of the backup operation. This also performs a standard validation.
To set the INI value, use PostValidate=2
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not validate the backup image after creating it.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 147 of 218


/ivbe IgnoreB4BError=1
Use this option to ignore byte-for-byte validation errors. The backup operation will
continue instead of aborting (errors will still be logged).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will abort the backup operation if a byte-for-byte
validation error is encountered.

/vpd ValidateDisk=1
You can use this option when saving images to a CD or DVD drive. This option ensures
that the discs containing image files are readable and verifies that the data on the discs
appears to be the same as the data that Image for DOS used to create the discs. Per-
disc validation can detect media errors that may have occurred during the disc writing
process. If Image for DOS detects an error, Image for DOS will prompt you to recreate
the failed disc.
Default if omitted: If you do not enable this option, Image for DOS will notify you of errors
only after the backup process completes, and you will need to recreate all discs in the
backup.

/ldu LimitDiscUsage=1
You can use this option when saving images to a CD or DVD drive. This option leaves
the last 10% of the disc unused which tends to encounter more data errors.
Default if omitted: If you do not enable this option, Image for DOS will use the entire disc.

/comp:n Compression=n
Specifies how Image for DOS should compress backup files as they are created. Valid
values for n are 0 through 15. The equivalent n values for the GUI compression options
are as follows:
0 – None
1 – Standard
2 – Enhanced Size - A
7 – Enhanced Size - B
10 – Enhanced Size - C
11 – Enhanced Size - D
12 – Enhanced Size - E
13 – Enhanced Size - F
14 – Enhanced Speed - A
15 – Enhanced Speed - B
The Enhanced Size - D/E/F options are faster than Enhanced Size - A/B/C, but provide
less compression. Backup files will normally be compressed more than the Standard
option. Enhanced Size values 2-10 offer increased compression as the value increases
at the expense of speed. Enhanced Size values 11-13 (D/E/F) offer slightly less
compression at a faster speed than their 2/7/10 (A/B/C) counterparts.
The Enhanced Speed - A/B options offer decent compression with the emphasis on
back up speed over backup file size. Backup files will normally be compressed less than
the Standard option. Value 15 offers higher compression than 14 at the expense of

Image for DOS User Manual Page 148 of 218


speed.
Actual compression levels and speeds obtained will vary depending on the data being
backed up and the system being used.
Note: The Enhanced Size - D/E/F options and the Enhanced Speed - A/B options are
not backwards compatible and require version 2.72 or later. Attempting to open a
backup file created using a compression value higher than 10 with version 2.71 or earlier
will result in a message to use the newer version or an error message that the image is
corrupt (depending on the older version being used).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses Enhanced Speed - A compression.

/enc:1 or /enc:3 Encryption=1 or Encryption=3


Specifies whether simple password protection without encryption (/enc:1), or 256-bit
AES encryption (/enc:3) is to be used. If either /enc:1 or /enc:3 are specified, /pw or
/opw is also required.
Default if omitted: No encryption or password protection is used.

/noej NoEject=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS never to automatically open the optical drive
tray.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will automatically open the optical drive tray whenever
a new disc is needed and at the completion of the backup operation.

/cdrs:n CDReadSpeed=n
Use this setting to specify the maximum disc reading speed that Image for DOS will use
when reading disc media (CD/DVD/BD) during the validation phase of a backup
operation, with n being a positive integer (e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.). This setting may be used to
force a lower reading speed than that automatically used by the optical drive’s firmware.
Slower reading speeds may increase reliability.
n should be a positive integer (e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.).
This setting is only applicable when you are backing up to disc media and you have also
included either the /v or /vb option.
The maximum reading speed that is actually used is determined by whichever is lower:
The /cdrs:n value that you specify, or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive’s
firmware, according to the disc media in use. For example, if you are using media that is
rated at 32X (for reading), the maximum reading speed will be no more than 32X,
regardless of the setting you choose here. Similarly, if you supply a value that is invalid
for or beyond the drive’s design limits, the drive will automatically use the next-highest
speed supported by both the drive and the media in use.
DVD speeds are approximately 1/8 CD speeds, so if you are using DVD discs, multiply
the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use here. For example, to obtain a
maximum reading speed of 4X with a DVD, use /cdrs:32, since 8 × 4X = 32.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the Optimal speed setting.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 149 of 218


/iobs:n IOBS=n
Include this option to try to improve I/O performance in cases where network or USB
device performance is poor. Provide n as the letter A to automatically try to determine
the best value, otherwise try a value such as 1, 2, or 3.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not use this option.

/err AllowErrors=1
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to ignore read/write errors caused by bad sectors
on the source drive during the backup operation. Image for DOS will also ignore errors
during the validation phase. This parameter does not apply to bad sectors on the target
drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will notify you concerning the error and give you the
option to continue or abort.

/mf N/A
Instructs Image for DOS to use Multiple File Set mode. Select this option to create a
backup that is comprised of one image for every individual partition that you back up.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses Single File Set mode and creates a single
image, regardless of the number of individual partitions you back up.

/desc:mydescription N/A
Use this option to specify the descriptive text you want Image for DOS to associate with
the backup, up to 511 characters (note that command line length limits may not allow a
maximum length description). If your descriptive text includes spaces, surround it with
quotation marks: /desc:“my description”
This option applies to both Normal and Simple Operations mode backups.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS doesn’t add any descriptive text.

/purge:n Purge=n
Use this option to delete image files that are n days old or older. You can think of it as
the number of days to retain images. It’s only used during a command line backup and
only processes the target folder of the current file specified using the /f option. Care
should be taken as the purge occurs prior to the backup. As an option you can have the
purge take place only after a successful backup by providing n as a negative number.
E.g. /purge:-15
Default if omitted: No image files are purged.

/filetpl:"filename" FileTemplate=filename
Sets the default file name offered during interactive use of the program during backup
operations.
Default if omitted: The program uses a name that includes the date.

/hash CreateHash=1

Image for DOS User Manual Page 150 of 218


Use this option to have Image for DOS create a hash file to speed up creating a
Changes Only (differential or incremental) backup. This option is only available when
creating an image that is not being saved to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). By default, this
option is also ignored if the /bc (BackwardsCompatible) option is enabled. The hash file
will be limited to the max file size and have the same file name as the backup with an
extension starting at .#0 followed by .#1, .#2, etc. as needed. The actual speed increase
realized when creating an image will vary depending on the system. If the hash file is
deleted the backup will proceed as normal without it.
This option can also be used to create a hash file for an existing image. For example:
/hash /f:"e:\backups\win7full.tbi"
Note: When creating a backup, this option will also create a special-use file with the .#_#
extension. When using the command line, this file can be used in place of the .TBI base
image, which may be located elsewhere (e.g. ftp, offsite), along with the hash file to
create a changes-only backup.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not create the hash file during a backup
operation.

/hdir:"path" N/A
Use this option to have Image for DOS save the hash files to a different folder than the
backup files. For example, this can be used when the backup files are saved to a
location that ends up remote, but you wish to keep the hash files local.
Example:
image /b /d:w0 /f:"H:\Backups\Win10" /hash /hdir:"E:\Hash Files"
Note: Image for DOS may not be able to maintain the hash files automatically when
saved to an alternate location (for example, when deleting or overwriting backups).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will save the hash files in the same folder as the
backup files.

/usemd UseMetaData=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS create a hash file from the file system metadata
to speed up creating a Changes Only (differential or incremental) backup. This option is
only supported for NTFS partitions and relies on file system metadata to determine what
gets backed up. Using this option in conjunction with Faster Changes Only Backups
(/hash) can greatly decrease the time required to create the backup. This option is not
supported when creating an image that is being saved to disc media (CD/DVD/BD). By
default, this option is also ignored if the Backwards Compatible option is enabled. The
hash file will be limited to the max file size and have the same file name as the backup
with an extension starting at .@0 followed by .@1, .@2, etc. as needed. If the hash file is
deleted the backup will proceed as normal without it.
NOTE: You should only use this option if you understand its impact on backup and
restore operations.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not create the metadata hash file during a
backup operation.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 151 of 218


/del DelUsedHash=1
Use this parameter when creating a differential or incremental backup to tell Image for
DOS to delete the hash files used to create the backup (older unused hash files in the
chain won’t be deleted).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not delete the hash files used to create the
backup.

/exlist=filename N/A
IMPORTANT NOTE: This option is used at your own risk. Please make sure to create
standard backups of important data.
This option allows you to specify a file which contains a list of paths and/or files to
exclude from the backup image. The file must be ANSI text and located on the local file
system. FAT, FAT32, and NTFS file systems are supported (the option will be ignored
for other file systems).
The data of the excluded files is essentially compressed to zero. When restored, the files
will either be deleted or truncated (depending on the options selected). Note that even
though excluded, the data will still affect the minimum restore size (just as if it wasn’t
excluded). Additionally, the excluded files and folders will still show up in TBIView and
TBIMount. Excluded files extracted from the image using TBIView or TBIMount will be
full of zeros. An exception to this are very small files on NTFS (the contents of those files
will be intact).
When creating a differential or incremental backup using a base full image created with
the /exlist option, the list from the base image will be used (a new list specified for the
backup will be ignored). Otherwise, the specified exclusion list will be used for the
backup.
Each line in the exclusion file should be in the following format:
[options]path >
Valid options are:
f - Exclude files only. Do not delete folders. If not specified, folders will be
deleted.
t - Truncate files instead of deleting them. Folders will not be deleted. Files
are restored with a size of zero bytes.
k - Keep the base folder (instead of deleting it) when recursion is used and the
entire contents are excluded.
The path can be complete to exclude a specific folder (e.g. \Games) or you can use
wildcards (*, ?) to specify matching files. When excluding a folder, use a trailing
backslash ( \ ) to indicate a folder is specified (otherwise, a search will be made for
matching files). Do not surround the path with quotes even if it includes spaces. Do not
specify a drive letter.
To also exclude files from subdirectories (apply recursion), include the > (greater than)
character after the path.
Examples:
[t]*.jpg - exclude all *.jpg files in the root folder, files will be truncated

Image for DOS User Manual Page 152 of 218


\*.iso - exclude all *.iso files in the root folder
\Backups\*.tbi - exclude all *.tbi files in the \Backups folder
[k]\Games\ > - exclude the \Games folder and all sub-folders, keep
the \Games folder (use trailing backslash to indicate folder)
\Work\Archive\ - exclude the \Work\Archive folder, sub-folders not excluded
(use trailing backslash to indicate folder)
*.jpg > - exclude all *.jpg files in the root folder and all sub-folders
[f]\Movies\*.mpg > - exclude all *.mpg files in the \Movies folder and all
sub-folders, folders will not be deleted
\ISO Files\Old\*.iso > - exclude all *.iso files in \ISO Files\Old folder and all
sub-folders
Default if omitted: Image for DOS includes all files on the partition in the backup (the
page file and hibernation file will be included or excluded per their respective options).

/log:0 SaveLog=0
Disables logging.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS logs during a backup operation.

/mss ManualStoreSelection=1
This option applies only to Simple Operations mode backups. Use option to have Image
for DOS prompt you to select where to save the backup even if a backup store already
exists. If more than one store exists you will always be prompted, even if this option is
not used.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will automatically select the store for the backup when
only one store exists.

Image for DOS Restore Options


In Table 4, you find the command line options that you must set to use Image for
DOS to restore a backup image. Table 5 shows you optional parameters you can
set.

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the parameter are available; in other cases, only one
is available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an
INI file, place these parameters in the [Restore_Defaults] section, unless as noted
otherwise.

Table 4: Image for DOS Required Restore Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/r N/A
Use this option to indicate that you want to restore an image file.
Also required: The /f option to specify image file Image for DOS should use when
restoring.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 153 of 218


/d N/A
Use when restoring a backup to identify the target hard drive and partition. Image for
DOS will restore the image to the same hard drive number and physical location on the
drive that you backed up unless you override this setting.
If the target partition was a volume and no extended partition now exists at the original
location, Image for DOS will attempt to create the original extended partition. If Image for
DOS cannot create the extended partition, Image for DOS will restore the image as a
primary partition.
If the target partition was originally a primary partition and an extended partition now
exists at that location, Image for DOS will restore the image as a volume.
If an existing partition or volume occupies the same starting location as the partition you
want to restore, Image for DOS will display a warning message before overwriting the
partition or volume. You can suppress this warning message, as described in Table 5.)
/d:d@p d is the target hard drive number
/d:bd@p
p is the target partition or volume ID (hex
/d:ad@p
or decimal notation), depending on
/d:ud@p
whether you are referring to a partition or
/d:fd@p
a volume. Use this parameter only if you
/d:sd@p
are restoring an individual partition.
/d:od@p
/d:#ntsig # – NT Disk Signature Follows (or omit
/d:{GUID} signature to match on original signature)
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID (or omit GUID
to match on original GUID)
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /d: and before the target
hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device

/f N/A
Use this option to specify the target drive letter, path, and file name for a backup file.
/f:x:\filename x:\ is target drive letter
/f:x:\mypath\filename mypath or my path is path to filename

Image for DOS User Manual Page 154 of 218


/f:”x:\my path\file name" filename is target file name for image
Or: Or:
/f:d@p:\filename Specify target device, partition, path, and
file name:
/f:d@p:\mypath\filename
d is target hard drive number
/f:"d@p:\my path\filename”
p is target partition ID (hex or decimal
/f:#ntsig@p:\mypath\filename
notation)
/f:{GUID}@p:\mypath\filename
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
mypath or my path is path to filename
filename is target file name for image
Device modifiers may be used as needed.
When used, they must be placed after the
/f: and before the target hard drive
number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s).
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

The above options are required when you restore a backup using Image for DOS
from the command line. In Table 5, you find a list of the optional restore parameters
you can use when you run Image for DOS from the command line.

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the options are available; in other cases, only one is
available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an INI
file, place these parameters in the [Restore_Defaults] section for Normal mode
restores (unless as noted otherwise). If the parameter is available in Simple
Operations mode, place it in the [Simple_Restore_Defaults] section.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 155 of 218


Table 5: Image for DOS Optional Restore Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/o N/A
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to overwrite the target without first prompting for
confirmation.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS prompts before overwriting the target.

/base N/A
Note: This parameter is optional when restoring a differential or incremental backup and
should normally be omitted. Instead, use the /sch option if it’s necessary to specify the
location of any of the base images.
When restoring from a differential or incremental backup, use this parameter to identify
the base backup Image for DOS should use.
/base:x:\bkup x:\ is source drive letter
/base:x:\mypath\bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup
/base:"x:\my path\bkup" bkup is name of the base backup (omit
the file extension)
Or:
Or:
/base:d@p:\bkup
Specify source device, partition, path, and
/base:d@p:\mypath\bkup
file name:
/base:"d@p:\my path\bkup"
d is source hard drive number
/base:#ntsig@p:\mypath\bkup
p is source partition ID (hex or decimal
/base:{GUID}@p:\mypath\bkup notation)
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /base: and before the
source hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be

Image for DOS User Manual Page 156 of 218


used with a, u, f, and s).
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

/clr N/A
Use this option to have Image for DOS clear the MBR and EMBR prior to restoring an
image file.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not clear the MBR and EMBR.

/rb:n N/A
Use this option to specify what Image for DOS should do after restoring an image. The
value n can be one of the following:
0 – No reboot
1 – Reboot with all prompts
2 – Reboot with completion message, but without reboot message (error does not
cancel reboot)
4 – Reboot without completion message or reboot message (error cancels reboot)
8 – Shutdown
64 – Exit program
Default if omitted: Image for DOS attempts to determine if the computer needs to be
rebooted after restoring and, if so, prompts you to reboot.

/sp:p N/A
Use this option to specify an individual partition ID to restore from a full backup. p is the
source partition ID (in hex or decimal notation).
Default if omitted: If you supply a backup of an entire hard drive as the source for
restoring, Image for DOS will restore all partitions contained in the backup.

/sig ReplaceNTSig=1
This option applies when you restore a partition that had been assigned a drive letter
within Windows prior to being backed up. If you select this option, Image for DOS will
restore the disk signature associated with the source partition. If you are restoring a
partition that had been assigned a drive letter in Windows and you wish to keep that
drive letter assignment, select this option.
Note: The source Windows drive letter assignment will only be kept if it was previously
assigned on the Windows system where the restored partition is used and the drive
letter is not currently in use by another partition.
Note: The disk GUID of a target GPT drive will not be changed.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use the disk signature already present in the MBR
of the target drive; if none exists, Image for DOS will create one if necessary.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 157 of 218


/csig ChangeDiskSigGUIDs=1
When performing full drive restores, this option allows you to change the NT Signature
restored to the target drive. For target GPT drives, the MBR NT Signature, the GPT Disk
GUID, and the partition GUIDs will all be changed. This can be useful if you plan on
having both the original and restored hard drive in the same computer at the same time
while running Windows; otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and
modify it which may (depending on the OS) prevent the restored hard drive from booting
properly.
When restoring single or multiple partitions to a GPT drive, this option will change the
GUID of each partition restored.
To retain the existing signature used by the target drive also specify the /csigut option.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not change the restored disk signature, drive
GUIDs, or partition GUIDs.

/chgvsn ChgVolSN=1
Use this option to change the file system volume ID/serial number of restored
FAT//FAT32/NTFS/HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2/3/4 partitions.
Default if omitted: The file system volume ID/serial number or UUID is not changed.

/nvn:"name" N/A
Use this option to specify the new volume name (label) for the restored partition. If
multiple partitions are being restored they will all be set to the specified name.
For example:
image /r /d:b3@0x4 /f:"H:\mybackup" /sp:0x4 /nvn:"Win8 Copy"
Default if omitted: The volume name will not be changed from its restored value.

/ohd UseOrgHDNum=1
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to keep references to the source hard drive number
intact within the partition after Image for DOS has restored the partition to the target
drive. This option is primarily used for Linux partitions.
Default if omitted: If the target drive number differs from that of the source drive, Image
for DOS will update applicable drive references residing within the restored partition to
reflect the new hard drive number.

/a SetActive=1
Use this parameter to make the partition you restore active.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not make the restored partition active unless no
other partitions are active and the restored partition is HD0.

/t WriteMBR=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS install standard MBR code after completing
the restore operation. Standard MBR code is the code that boots the active partition.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 158 of 218


Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not write standard MBR code unless the MBR is
empty.

/e UseSameMBREntry=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS move the partition table entry of the restored
partition to the same location in the master partition table as it appeared on the source
drive. Image for DOS will move the existing partition table entry to another location
rather than overwriting it.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not move the partition table of the restored
partition.

/ms:n N/A
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS move the partition table entry of the restored
partition to a given slot in the MBR. The value n is 0 to 3. This option is only applicable
when restoring a single partition.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not move the partition table of the restored
partition.

/embrid:n N/A
This parameter is used to set a specific ID value to the restored partition if an EMBR
exists. The ID is only used if not already in use by another partition. To assume the
same ID as a partition being overwritten, use the value zero for n.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the restored partition’s original id.

/gpt N/A
Instruct Image for DOS to create a GPT on the target drive. Note that restoring first
track overrides this option. This is mainly used with the /clr option to ensure the full size
of the drive that is greater than 2TiB is accessible. You can also provide an option
/nomsr if the GPT to be created should not have a Microsoft Reserved Partition created
on it.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not create a GPT on the drive.

/rft RFT=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS restore the first track when it restores the
partition. Restoring the first track may also change the disk type (MBR/EMBR/GPT) of
the destination drive if it doesn’t match that of the source drive (the restore will abort if
the change is required and cannot be applied).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not restore the first track.

/fts:n RFTS=n
Use this option to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive Image for
DOS should restore. Use 0 to indicate the entire track
Default if omitted: Image for DOS determines the number of tracks needed to restore.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 159 of 218


/stt Scale=1
For NTFS/FAT/FAT32/EXT 2/3/4 partitions, use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to
resize each restored partition proportionally, so that each partition takes up the same
relative amount of space on the target drive as it did on the source drive. Unpartitioned
free space that existed on the source drive at the time of the backup will still exist at the
end of the target drive after Image for DOS completes the restore operation.
This option only applies when you restore an entire hard drive;
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not scale each restored partition.

/x Expand=1
For NTFS/FAT/FAT32/EXT 2/3/4 partitions, when restoring to a target that is larger than
the source partition, use this parameter to have Image for DOS expand the partition after
completing the restore operation.
This option is equivalent to the “Scale to Fit” option for fully restoring drives.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not expand the partition, and free space will
remain after Image for DOS completes the restore operation.

/kf:n KeepFree=n
Use this parameter if you also use either /x or /stt to specify the amount of space, in
MiB, Image for DOS should leave free.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will fill the entire available area.

/m FirstFit=1
When restoring a partition, use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to choose the target
area automatically, based on the first area of available free space large enough to
accommodate the partition you want to restore.
When restoring or copying a full drive, this parameter will remove any gaps (free space)
between partitions, restoring them adjacent to each other.
Note: For Simple Operations restores using the user interface, the value of this setting
will apply.
Default if omitted: You must explicitly specify the target area when restoring a partition.
Gaps may exist between restored partitions when restoring or copying a full drive.

/last LastFit=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS place the restored partition at the top of the
last free block large enough (e.g. restore to the end of the drive). This option is valid only
when restoring a single partition and doesn’t support resizing.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will restore the partition normally toward the start of
the drive or free space area.

/cd CompactData=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS compact FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions during

Image for DOS User Manual Page 160 of 218


the restore so they fit into the space needed to hold the data. This is useful when
restoring to a smaller drive or partition and the source drive/partition was not compacted
beforehand.
A clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent the resize from
succeeding will result in the destination partition being deleted (the data is not usable).
For Simple Operations restores using the user interface, the value of this setting will
apply.
This option is not applicable if the /mp (MultiPass) option is used.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not compact data during the restore.

/usemd UseMetaData=1
If the backup image being restored has a metadata hash file you can use this option to
restore using the file system metadata of supported partitions (NTFS). Depending on the
system and the data being restored, this type of restore may be considerably faster than
a normal restore. Due to this type of restore depending on the destination partition’s file
system metadata being valid, you would use it for undoing changes and not for
recovering from file system corruption (a normal restore should be used in that case).
This option is not applicable if /mp (Multi-Pass), /cd (Compact Data), or /wipe (Wipe)
is used.
NOTE: You should only use this option if you understand its impact on restore
operations.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not use the metadata hash file during a restore
operation.

/rp:n N/A
This option is intended for use when restoring multiple partitions from a backup image
located on a recovery partition to the drive containing the recovery partition. All partitions
on the drive except the partition indicated by the ID value n will be deleted prior to the
restore. Typically this option would be used with /x /rft or /x /m /rft. Scaling of the
restored partitions will operate as if a full drive image were being restored.
This option is only supported when restoring multiple partitions and cannot be used
when restoring an entire drive image.
Due to the way this option functions and scaling is performed, placing the recovery
partition at the start of the drive is recommended. This allows easy scaling to different
size drives when restoring.
Example: A Windows drive contains the following four partitions:
ID 0x1 Recovery Partition
ID 0x2 System Reserved
ID 0x3 Windows
ID 0x4 Data
The Recovery partition contains a backup image of partitions 0x2, 0x3, and 0x4. A
restore of those partitions that would scale to a different size drive would be performed
by running the following command:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 161 of 218


image /r /d:w0 /f:w0@0x1:\Recovery.tbi /sp:0x2,0x3,0x4 /x /rft /rp:0x1 /ubp

Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not support scaling a multi-partition restore.

/v PreValidate=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS perform a standard validation on the image
file(s) before restoring them.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not validate the image files before restoring
them.

/vb PostValidate=2
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS check that each byte from the source image
file was restored to the drive properly.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not validate the restored data.

/ivbe IgnoreB4BError=1
Use this option to ignore byte-for-byte validation errors. The restore operation will
continue instead of aborting (errors will still be logged).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will abort the restore operation if a byte-for-byte
validation error is encountered.

/sch:“path” N/A
Use this parameter to specify the search paths Image for DOS uses when looking for
base images in the backup chain. path can use the d@p:\path format to specify the drive
and partition id.
This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple search paths (e.g. when the
images in the backup chain are not all stored in the same folder).
Examples (commands should be on one line):
image /r /f:"E:\Backups\Win8System - Inc D" /sch:"E:\Backups"
/sch:"E:\Backups\Archive"
image /r /f:"b1@0x2:\Images\WinXP Drive - Inc E"
/sch:"b1@0x2:\Images" /sch:"b1@0x2:\Images\Full"
Default if omitted: Image for DOS searches only the folder of the specified image for
base images in the backup chain.

/pw:mypassword or /pw:“my password” N/A


Use this parameter to supply the password needed to decrypt a backup that you
encrypted and/or password protected when you created it. If your password contains
embedded spaces, place quotation marks around it.
This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain (base
+ differential/incrementals).
Default if both /pw and /opw are omitted: Image for DOS does not supply a password.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 162 of 218


/opw=n OPW=n
Specifies an obfuscated password to decrypt a backup that was encrypted and/or
password protected when created. The obfuscated password will also be used when the
command line for the operation is saved or exported (e.g. to a .bat file).
This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain (base
+ differential/incrementals).
This option applies to both Normal and Simple Operations mode restores. The INI option
must be in the [Shared_Backup_Defaults] section and does not apply to command line
operations.
Default if both /pw and /opw are omitted: Image for DOS does not supply a password.

/noej NoEject=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to never automatically open the optical drive
tray.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will automatically open the optical drive tray whenever
a new disc is needed and when Image for DOS finishes restoring.

/cdrs:n CDReadSpeed=n
Use this setting to specify the maximum disc reading speed that Image for DOS will use
when reading disc media (CD/DVD/BD) while restoring a backup image, with n being a
positive integer (e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.). This setting may be used to force a lower reading
speed than that automatically used by the optical drive’s firmware. Slower reading
speeds may increase reliability.
n should be a positive integer (e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.).
This setting is only applicable when you are restoring from disc media and you have also
included the /v option.
The maximum reading speed that is actually used is determined by whichever is lower:
The /cdrs:n value that you specify, or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive’s
firmware, according to the disc media in use. For example, if you are using media that is
rated at 32X (for reading), the maximum reading speed will be no more than 32X,
regardless of the setting you choose here. Similarly, if you supply a value that is invalid
for or beyond the drive’s design limits, the drive will automatically use the next-highest
speed supported by both the drive and the media in use.
DVD speeds are approximately 1/8 CD speeds, so if you are using DVD discs, multiply
the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use here. For example, to obtain a
maximum reading speed of 4X with a DVD, use /cdrs:32, since 8 × 4X = 32.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the Optimal speed setting.

/iobs IOBS=1
Include this option to try to improve I/O performance in cases where network or USB
device performance is poor.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not use this option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 163 of 218


/err AllowErrors=1
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to ignore read/write errors caused by bad sectors
on the target drive during the restore operation. This parameter does not apply to bad
sectors on the source drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will notify you concerning the error and give you the
option to continue or abort.

/ubi UpdateBootIni=1
This option only applies if a copy of boot.ini exists in the root directory of the restored
partition. If you enable this option, Image for DOS updates all partition(n) references in
the restored partition's boot.ini file to accommodate a partition layout that differs from
that of the original drive. Image for DOS will set all partition-based entries in the
applicable boot.ini to point to the restored partition (but will not change file-based
entries). This option has no effect when doing a full drive restore.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not try to update the boot.ini file.

/ubp UpdateBootPart=1
This option updates any references to the restored partition in the active boot partition on
the target drive. This is useful for situations where the boot partition differs from the
system partition. However, you typically wouldn't want to use this option if you're
creating a copy of an existing partition you want to keep, unless the target drive will be
independent of the original drive. For this to be useful, the active boot partition should
already be on the target drive or part of the same copy or restore operation.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not update the active boot partition.

/igpt OSIgnoresGPT=1
Use this option when restoring to a GPT drive to indicate that the operating system being
restored will not see the destination drive as GPT when booted. For example, an iMac
using BootCamp or cases where the 0xEE placeholder partition is missing from the
MBR. This option prevents Image for DOS from using GPT specific fix-up information on
the drive after the restore.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use GPT specific fix-up information on GPT drives.

/wipe Wipe=1
This option will wipe (zero-out) unused sectors in the restored partition(s) or drive,
depending on the type of restore performed.

When restoring single partitions or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with
existing partitions, sectors located outside of the restored partition(s) are not wiped. If a
partition is resized during the restore, the wiped area for that partition is the final size of
the restored partition (not the size of the source partition).

When restoring a full drive or when restoring multiple partitions to a drive with no existing
partitions, the entire drive is wiped, including all gaps between any partitions. Using this
option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and restore in a single operation (such as
when deploying images to used systems).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 164 of 218


Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not perform any wiping of unused sectors.

/mp MultiPass=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use Multi Pass mode when restoring a
differential or incremental backup. In Multi Pass mode, Image for DOS restores the full
backup in one pass and then restores the differential backup in a second pass or
incrementals in multiple passes. This setting is not applicable when restoring a full
backup. You must use this option if the applicable full backup resides on removable
media.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses Single Pass mode, restoring the full backup and
the differential backup or incremental backups in one pass.

/cds N/A
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to query all available CD/DVD/BD drives when
trying to locate the appropriate source backup.
Default if omitted: You must explicitly specify the CD/DVD/BD drive that contains the
source backup.

/te TermEmulation=1
Instructs Image for DOS to terminate floppy emulation mode after booting from a CD or
DVD. This can help rectify certain compatibility issues caused by floppy emulation, but if
you use te, the physical floppy diskette drive will be unavailable while Image for DOS is
running.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses floppy emulation mode until you exit from Image
for DOS.

/mo N/A
Instructs Image for DOS to display the following message immediately upon running:
Press the <space bar> for the menu interface or wait for the restore to start...
If you press the space bar while this message appears, Image for DOS will switch to
interactive mode and wait for you to initiate the restore operation via the menu interface.
Default if omitted: The Press the <space bar>… message is not displayed and the
restore operation proceeds using the command line.

/att AlignToTarget=1
When restoring a full drive image, use this option to instruct Image for DOS to force
alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive. For
example, if the /a2k option is also specified the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB
boundaries.
When restoring a single partition, specifying this option will instruct Image for DOS to not
adjust the alignment (1MiB partition alignment will be used if the target has it already or
not if it doesn’t and a partition already exists).
Default if omitted: The alignment used on the target drive will be determined

Image for DOS User Manual Page 165 of 218


automatically based on the source drive.

/n2ka N/A
Normally, Image for DOS will automatically use 1MiB partition alignment on command
line restores when the backup contains 1MiB aligned partitions. Use this option to
instruct Image for DOS not to automatically override normal cylinder based alignment.
If this option is disabled and Image for DOS determines that 1MiB partition alignment is
needed, then both Align2048 and AlignEndHS options are enabled for the restore.
Note: This option has been deprecated, but will remain supported for backwards
compatibility. The /att option should be used instead.
Default if omitted. Alignment is automatically determined when restoring from the
command line. When a single partition is being restored and /a2k is not used, Image for
DOS will use 1MiB partition alignment if the destination drive contains a 1MiB aligned
partition or cylinder alignment if the drive contains a partition which is not 1MiB aligned.
Otherwise, the alignment used is obtained from the image being restored.

/aoe:n AlignOnEnd=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align restored partitions at the end of a
cylinder, or when the Align2048 option is enabled, end of a 1MiB boundary.
2 – Align on end by resizing
0 – Disable align on end
Default if omitted: Normal alignment (/aoe:1) is used.

/a2k Align2048=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align restored partitions based on 1MiB
boundaries (drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors; drives with
4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors).
If this option is enabled then you will normally want to enable the AlignEndHS (/ahs)
option and disable the AlignOnEnd (/aoe:0) option.
Default if omitted. Alignment is automatically determined when restoring from the
command line. When a single partition is being restored and /a2k is not used, Image for
DOS will use 1MiB partition alignment if the destination drive contains a 1MiB aligned
partition or cylinder alignment if the drive contains a partition which is not 1MiB aligned.
Otherwise, the alignment used is obtained from the image being restored.

/av:n AlignVal=n
Place under the [HDx] section
This option allows you to specify a custom partition alignment value for restored
partition(s). For example, to specify that partitions should be aligned on 2MiB
boundaries, use /av:2M or AlignVal=2M. Invalid sizes will be ignored. This option
overrides the other device alignment options.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 166 of 218


Default if omitted. This option is not set (a custom alignment value will not be used).

/ahs AlignEndHS=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to force a restored partition’s ending head and
sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry.
Default if omitted. The actual ending head and sector values are used.

/ahst AlignHSOnTrunc=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to set a restored partition’s head and sector
values in the MBR to match the current geometry when it is located outside the range of
the current geometry.
Default if omitted. The actual ending head and sector values are used.

/mg UseMBRGeo=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Set this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use the geometry based on the MBR entry of
the first partition in the backup image. This is used when restoring a backup.
Default if omitted: The geometry of the target drive or UseOrgGeo option is used.

/mgv UseValidMBRGeoOnly=1
Place under the [HDx] section
This option is used to ensure that the geometry from the MBR on the original system is
aligned to known standards before accepting it for use. It only applies when /mg
(UseMBRGeo) is used.
Default if omitted: This option is disabled.

/og UseOrgGeo=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Set this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use the original geometry of the source drive
based on the environment used when the backup was created.
Default if omitted: The geometry of the target drive is used.

/c=n c=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter in conjunction with /h and /s to manually specify the cylinder, head,
and sector values for the target drive when you restore a backup image. This parameter
specifies the last cylinder, and n is a number you supply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the BIOS-reported values of the drive.

/h=n h=n
Place under the [HDx] section

Image for DOS User Manual Page 167 of 218


Use this parameter in conjunction with /c and /s to manually specify the cylinder, head,
and sector values for the target drive when you restore a backup image. This parameter
specifies the last head, and n is a number you supply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the BIOS-reported values of the drive.

/s=n s=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter in conjunction with /c and /h to manually specify the cylinder, head,
and sector values for the target drive when you restore a backup image. This parameter
specifies the last sector, and n is a number you supply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the BIOS-reported values of the drive.

/gc GeoCalc=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Determine how a devices' geometry is obtained or calculated.
0=Default, 1=LBA, 2=Large, 3=Normal, 4=Bit-Shift, 5=Device Bit-Shift.
Default if omitted: Default method is used.

/rs:n N/A
Use this parameter to resize a partition after restoring. n is the size in MiB’s that you
want to establish for the restored partition. If you try to use this parameter in conjunction
with /x, the Expand option, /x overrides /rs.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS restores the partition without resizing.

/exlist:n ExcludeList=n
This option will override the method used when excluded files/folders are restored (the
backup image being restored must have been created with an exclusion list).
The following values for n are supported:
0 – Excluded files are restored with their actual sizes, but contain whatever data is
already on the drive (files are not wiped or zero-filled).
1 – Excluded files are deleted. Folders will not be deleted.
2 – Excluded files are truncated (files will exist, but all have a size of zero bytes).
3 – Excluded files and folders are deleted. This option does not delete base folders
specified to keep in the exclusion list.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS truncates or deletes the excluded files as specified in
the exclusion list.

/wco WriteChangedSecsOnly=1
Use this option when restoring to write only the changed sectors to the target drive
(target will be read to compare). Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the
same and it’s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive (e.g. restoring image to SSD
drive).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 168 of 218


Default if omitted: Image for DOS will write all restored sectors normally.

/trim Trim=1
Use this option to TRIM the target area of the restore destination drive prior to restoring
the image. This option is only available if the target drive supports TRIM.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not TRIM the target area of drive.

/unh Unhide=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS unhide partitions that are restored in the hidden
state. If a partition’s hidden state is unsupported it will remain hidden.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not unhide restored hidden partitions.

/hp N/A
Use this option to have Image for DOS set the restored partitions as hidden type
partitions for the drive type (MBR/EMBR/GPT).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not change the restored partitions to the hidden
type.

/log:0 SaveLog=0
Disables logging.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS logs during a restore operation.

Image for DOS Validate Options


In Table 6, you find the command line options that you must set to use Image for
DOS to validate an image.

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the parameter are available; in other cases, only one
is available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an
INI file, place these parameters in the [Validate_Defaults] section, unless as noted
otherwise.

Table 6: Image for DOS Required Validate Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/v N/A
Use this option to indicate that you want to validate an image file.
Also required: The path name, as described below, to identify the location of the backup
image you want to validate.

/f N/A

Image for DOS User Manual Page 169 of 218


Use this option to specify the target drive letter, path, and file name for a backup file.
/f:x:\filename x:\ is target drive letter
/f:x:\mypath\filename mypath or my path is path to filename
/f:”x:\my path\file name" filename is target file name for image
Or: Or:
/f:d@p:\filename Specify target device, partition, path, and
file name:
/f:d@p:\mypath\filename
d is target hard drive number
/f:"d@p:\my path\filename”
p is target partition ID (hex or decimal
/f:#ntsig@p:\mypath\bkup
notation)
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
mypath or my path is path to filename
filename is target file name for image
Device modifiers may be used as needed.
When used, they must be placed after the
/f: and before the target hard drive
number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s).
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

In Table 7, you find the command line parameters that you might want to use with
Image for DOS when validating an image.

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the parameter are available; in other cases, only one

Image for DOS User Manual Page 170 of 218


is available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an
INI file, place these parameters in the [Validate_Defaults] section, unless as noted
otherwise.

Table 7: Image for DOS Optional Validation Parameters

Command Line Option INI Variable


/noej NoEject=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS never to automatically open the optical drive
tray.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will automatically open the optical drive tray whenever
a new disc is needed and at the completion of the validate operation.

/cdrs:n CDReadSpeed=n
Use this setting to specify the maximum disc reading speed that Image for DOS will use
when reading disc media (CD/DVD/BD) during validation, with n being a positive integer
(e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.). This setting may be used to force a lower reading speed than that
automatically used by the optical drive’s firmware. Slower reading speeds may increase
reliability.
n should be a positive integer (e.g. 2, 4, 16, etc.).
This setting is only applicable when you are validating an image stored on disc media.
The maximum reading speed that is actually used is determined by whichever is lower:
The /cdrs:n value that you specify, or the speed deemed appropriate by the drive’s
firmware, according to the disc media in use. For example, if you are using media that is
rated at 32X (for reading), the maximum reading speed will be no more than 32X,
regardless of the setting you choose here. Similarly, if you supply a value that is invalid
for or beyond the drive’s design limits, the drive will automatically use the next-highest
speed supported by both the drive and the media in use.
DVD speeds are approximately 1/8 CD speeds, so if you are using DVD discs, multiply
the desired speed by 8 to determine the value to use here. For example, to obtain a
maximum reading speed of 4X with a DVD, use /cdrs:32, since 8 × 4X = 32.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the Optimal speed setting.

/iobs IOBS=1
Include this option to try to improve I/O performance in cases where network or USB
device performance is poor.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not use this option.

/mp MultiPass=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use Multi Pass mode when validating a
differential or incremental backup. In Multi Pass mode, Image for DOS validates the full
backup in one pass and the differential backup in a second pass or incrementals in
multiple passes. This setting is not applicable when validating a full backup. This option
must be used if the applicable full backup resides on removable media.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 171 of 218


Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses Single Pass mode, validating in one pass.

/base N/A
Note: This parameter is optional when validating a differential or incremental backup and
should normally be omitted. Instead, use the /sch option if it’s necessary to specify the
location of any of the base images.
Use when validating a differential or incremental backup to identify the base backup
Image for DOS should use to validate the backup.
/base:x:\bkup x:\ is source drive letter
/base:x:\mypath\bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup
/base:"x:\my path\bkup" bkup is name of existing base backup
(omit file extension)
Or:
Or:
/base:d@p:\bkup
Specify source device, partition, path, and
/base:d@p:\mypath\bkup
file name:
/base:"d@p:\my path\bkup"
d is source hard drive number
/base:#ntsig@p:\mypath\bkup
p is source partition ID (hex or decimal
/base:{GUID}@p:\mypath\bkup notation)
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /base: and before the
source hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s).
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 172 of 218


/sch:“path” N/A
Use this parameter to specify the search paths Image for DOS uses when looking for
base images in the backup chain. path can use the d@p:\path format to specify the drive
and partition id.
This option can be used multiple times to specify multiple search paths (e.g. when the
images in the backup chain are not all stored in the same folder).
Examples (commands should be on one line):
image /v /f:"E:\Backups\Win8System - Inc D" /sch:"E:\Backups"
/sch:"E:\Backups\Archive"
image /v /f:"b1@0x2:\Images\WinXP Drive - Inc E"
/sch:"b1@0x2:\Images" /sch:"b1@0x2:\Images\Full"
Default if omitted: Image for DOS searches only the folder of the specified image for
base images in the backup chain.

/pw:mypassword or /pw:“my password” N/A


Use this parameter to supply the password needed to decrypt a backup that you
encrypted and/or password protected when you created it. If your password contains
embedded spaces, place quotation marks around it.
This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain (base
+ differential/incrementals).
Default if both /pw and /opw are omitted: Image for DOS does not supply a password.

/opw=n OPW=n
Specifies an obfuscated password to decrypt a backup that was encrypted and/or
password protected when created. The obfuscated password will also be used when the
command line for the operation is saved or exported (e.g. to a .bat file).
This option can be specified multiple times as required by the backup image chain (base
+ differential/incrementals).
This option applies to both Normal and Simple Operations mode restores. The INI option
must be in the [Shared_Backup_Defaults] section and does not apply to command line
operations.
Default if both /pw and /opw are omitted: Image for DOS does not supply a password.

/log:0 SaveLog=0
Disables logging.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS logs during a validate operation.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 173 of 218


Image for DOS Copy Options
In Table 8, you find the command line options that you can set to use Image for
DOS to make a copy of a partition or drive.

The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the parameter are available; in other cases, only one
is available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an
INI file, place these parameters in the [Copy_Defaults] section.

Table 8: Image for DOS Required Copy Parameters


Command Line Option INI Variable
/copy N/A
Use this option to indicate that you want to perform a copy.

/sd N/A
Use this option to identify the source hard drive and partition. For most users, the
partition ID will be a number from 1 through 4. For partition IDs of 9 or below, you can
use a single digit in place of hexadecimal notation (e.g. 1 is equivalent to 0x1, and 5 is
equivalent to 0x5).
The volume ID will be a number formatted as 0xPVV, where P is the extended partition
and VV is the volume number in hexadecimal from 01 to FF.
If you are not sure of the partition or volume ID number, run Image for DOS using the
interface, choose the Backup option, and click Next. The screen that lists the partitions
and volumes also will display the ID in parentheses as a hexadecimal number. You
should prefix that number with a 0x on the command line.
/sd:d@p d is the source hard drive number
/sd:bd@p
p is the source partition or volume ID (hex
/sd:ad@p
or decimal notation), depending on
/sd:ud@p
whether you are referring to a partition or
/sd:fd@p
a volume. Use this parameter only if you
/sd:sd@p
are copying an individual partition.
/sd:od@p
/sd:vd@p # – NT Disk Signature Follows
/sd:#ntsig@p {GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
/sd:{GUID}@p
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /sd: and before the source
hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method

Image for DOS User Manual Page 174 of 218


u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device.

/td N/A
Use this option to identify the target hard drive and partition. For most users, the partition
ID will be a number from 1 through 4. For partition IDs of 9 or below, you can use a
single digit in place of hexadecimal notation (e.g. 1 is equivalent to 0x1, and 5 is
equivalent to 0x5).
The volume ID will be a number formatted as 0xPVV, where P is the extended partition
and VV is the volume number in hexadecimal from 01 to FF.
If you are not sure of the partition or volume ID number, run Image for DOS using the
interface, choose the Backup option, and click Next. The screen that lists the partitions
and volumes also will display the ID in parentheses as a hexadecimal number. You
should prefix that number with a 0x on the command line.
/td:d@p d is the target hard drive number
/td:bd@p
p is the target partition or volume ID (hex
/td:ad@p
or decimal notation), depending on
/td:ud@p
whether you are referring to a partition or
/td:fd@p
a volume. Use this parameter only if you
/td:sd@p
are copying an individual partition.
/td:od@p
/td:vd@p # – NT Disk Signature Follows
/td:#ntsig@p {GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
/td:{GUID}@p
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /td: and before the target
hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
v – Virtual device.

The above options are required when you perform a copy using Image for DOS
from the command line. In Table 9, you find a list of the optional copy parameters
you can use when you run Image for DOS from the command line.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 175 of 218


The table shows you both the command line option and the INI file variable. In
some instances, both forms of the options are available; in other cases, only one is
available. When one form of an option isn’t available, N/A appears. To set up an INI
file, place these parameters in the [Copy_Defaults] section for Normal mode copies.
If the parameter is available in Simple Operations mode, place it in the
[Simple_Copy_Defaults] section.

Table 9: Image for DOS Optional Copy Parameters


Command Line Option INI Variable
/raw RawMode=1
Set this parameter to force Image for DOS to use raw mode, which copies all sectors,
rather than just used sectors, even for recognized file systems.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS copies only used sectors backed up for recognized file
systems and uses raw mode automatically for unrecognized file systems.

/skp:0 SkipPageFile=0
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to include the page files (pagefile.sys,
swapfile.sys) in the copy.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS skips page file data.

/skh:0 SkipHiberFile=0
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to include the hibernation file
(hiberfil.sys) in the copy.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS skips the hibernation file data.

/skuj:0 SkipUsnJrnl=0
Set this parameter to instruct Image for DOS to include the NTFS $UsnJrnl file in the
copy.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will omit the NTFS $UsnJrnl file from the copy.

/o N/A
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to overwrite the target without first prompting for
confirmation.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS prompts before overwriting the target.

/clr N/A
Use this option to have Image for DOS clear the MBR and EMBR prior to copying.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not clear the MBR and EMBR.

/rb:n N/A
Use this option to specify what Image for DOS should do after the copy operation. The
value n can be one of the following:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 176 of 218


0 – No reboot
1 – Reboot with all prompts
2 – Reboot with completion message, but without reboot message (error does not
cancel reboot)
4 – Reboot without completion message or reboot message (error cancels reboot)
8 – Shutdown
64 – Exit program
Default if omitted: Image for DOS attempts to determine if the computer needs to be
rebooted after copying and, if so, prompts you to reboot.

/sig ReplaceNTSig=1
Use this option if you are copying a partition that Windows had assigned a drive letter
before you copied the drive. If you use this option, Image for DOS will copy the disk
signature associated with the source partition.
Note: The disk GUID of a target GPT drive will not be changed.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will use the disk signature already present in the MBR
of the target drive, or, if none exists, Image for DOS will create one.

/csig ChangeNTSig=1
When copying a full drive, this option allows you to change the NT Signature copied to
the target drive. For target GPT drives, the MBR NT Signature, the GPT Disk GUID, and
the partition GUIDs will all be changed. This can be useful if you plan on having both the
original and copied hard drive in the same computer at the same time while running
Windows; otherwise Windows may detect the duplicate signature and modify it which
may (depending on the OS) prevent the copied hard drive from booting properly.
When copying single or multiple partitions to a GPT drive, this option will change the
GUID of each partition copied.
To retain the existing signature used by the target drive also specify the /csigut option.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not change the copied disk signature, drive GUIDs,
or partition GUIDs.

/chgvsn ChgVolSN=1
Use this option to change the file system volume ID/serial number of copied
FAT//FAT32/NTFS/HPFS partitions and the UUID of Ext2/3/4 partitions.
Default if omitted: The file system volume ID/serial number or UUID is not changed.

/nvn:"name" N/A
Use this option to specify the new volume name (label) for the copied partition. If multiple
partitions are being copied they will all be set to the specified name.
For example:
image /copy /sd:b0@0x3 /td:b3@0x4 /nvn:"Win8 Copy"
Default if omitted: The volume name will not be changed from its copied value.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 177 of 218


/ohd UseOrgHDNum=1
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to keep references to the source hard drive number
intact within the partition after Image for DOS has copied the partition to the target drive.
This option is primarily used for Linux partitions.
Default if omitted: If the target drive number differs from that of the source drive, Image
for DOS will update applicable drive references residing within the copied partition to
reflect the new hard drive number.

/a SetActive=1
Use this parameter to make the partition you copy active.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not make the copied partition active unless no
other partitions are active and the target partition is on HD0.

/t WriteMBR=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS install standard MBR code after completing
the copy operation. Standard MBR code is the code that boots the active partition.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not write standard MBR code unless the MBR is
empty.

/e UseSameMBREntry=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS move the partition table entry of the copied
partition to the same location in the master partition table as it appeared on the source
drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not move the partition table of the copied
partition.

/ms:n N/A
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS move the partition table entry of the restored
partition to a given slot in the MBR. The value n is 0 to 3. This option is only applicable
when restoring a single partition.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not move the partition table of the restored
partition.

/embrid:n N/A
This parameter is used to set a specific ID value to the copied partition if an EMBR
exists. The ID is only used if not already in use by another partition. To assume the
same ID as a partition being overwritten, use the value zero for n.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the copied partitions original id.

/gpt N/A
Instruct Image for DOS to create a GPT on the target drive. Note that restoring first
track overrides this option. This is mainly used with the /clr option to ensure the full size
of the drive that is greater than 2TiB is accessible. You can also provide an option

Image for DOS User Manual Page 178 of 218


/nomsr if the GPT to be created should not have a Microsoft Reserved Partition created
on it. While Image for DOS supports a GPT, it does not currently officially support an
EFI based system.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not create a GPT on the drive.

/rft RFT=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS copy the first track when it copies the
partition. Copying the first track may also change the disk type (MBR/EMBR/GPT) of the
destination drive if it doesn’t match that of the source drive (the copy will abort if the
change is required and cannot be applied).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not copy the first track.

/fts:n RFTS=n
Use this option to specify how many sectors of the first track of the hard drive Image for
DOS should copy. Use 0 to indicate the entire track
Default if omitted: Image for DOS determines the number of tracks needed to copy.

/stt Scale=1
For NTFS/FAT/FAT32/EXT 2/3/4 partitions, use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to
resize each copied partition proportionally, so that each partition takes up the same
relative amount of space on the target drive as it did on the source drive. Unpartitioned
free space that existed on the source drive at the time of the backup will still exist at the
end of the target drive after Image for DOS completes the copy operation.
This option only applies when you copy an entire hard drive;
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not scale each copied partition.

/x Expand=1
For NTFS/FAT/FAT32/EXT 2/3/4 partitions, when copying to a target that is larger than
the source partition, use this parameter to have Image for DOS expand the partition after
completing the copy operation.
This option is equivalent to the “Scale to Fit” option for fully copying drives.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not expand the partition, and free space will
remain after Image for DOS completes the copy operation.

/kf:n KeepFree=n
Use this parameter if you also use either /x or /stt to specify the amount of space, in
mebibytes (MiB), that Image for DOS should leave free.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will fill the entire available area.

/m FirstFit=1
Use this parameter to tell Image for DOS to choose the target area automatically, based
on the first area of available free space large enough to accommodate the partition you

Image for DOS User Manual Page 179 of 218


want to copy.
Note: For Simple Operations copies using the user interface, the value of this setting will
apply.
Default if omitted: You must explicitly specify the target area.

/last LastFit=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS place the copied partition at the top of the
last free block large enough (e.g. restore to the end of the drive). This option is valid only
when copying a single partition and doesn’t support resizing.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will copy the partition normally toward the start of the
drive or free space area.

/cd CompactData=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS compact FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions during
the copy operation so they fit into the space needed to hold the data. This is useful when
copying to a smaller drive or partition and the source drive/partition was not compacted
beforehand.
A clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent the resize from
succeeding will result in the destination partition being deleted (the data is not usable).
For Simple Operations restores using the user interface, the value of this setting will
apply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not compact data during the copy operation.

/vb PostValidate=1
Use this parameter to have Image for DOS check that each byte from the source drive
was copied to the target drive properly.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not validate the copied data.

/ivbe IgnoreB4BError=1
Use this option to ignore byte-for-byte validation errors. The copy operation will continue
instead of aborting (errors will still be logged).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will abort the copy operation if a byte-for-byte
validation error is encountered.

/err AllowErrors=1
Use this option to tell Image for DOS to ignore read/write errors caused by bad sectors
on the source or target drive during the copy operation.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will notify you concerning the error and give you the
option to continue or abort.

/ubi UpdateBootIni=1
This option only applies if a copy of boot.ini exists in the root directory of the copied
partition. If enabled, this option instructs Image for DOS to update all partition(n)

Image for DOS User Manual Page 180 of 218


references in the restored partition's boot.ini file, to accommodate a partition layout that
differs from that of the original drive. Image for DOS will set all partition-based entries in
the applicable boot.ini to point to the copied partition (but will not change file-based
entries). This option has no effect when doing a full drive copy.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS does not try to update the boot.ini file.

/wipe Wipe=1
This option will wipe (zero-out) unused sectors in the copied partition(s) or drive,
depending on the type of copy performed.

When copying single partitions or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with
existing partitions, sectors located outside of the copied partition(s) are not wiped. If a
partition is resized during the copy, the wiped area for that partition is the final size of the
copied partition (not the size of the source partition).

When copying a full drive or when copying multiple partitions to a drive with no existing
partitions, the entire drive is wiped, including all gaps between any partitions. Using this
option provides an easy way to wipe a drive and copy to it in a single operation.

Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not perform any wiping of unused sectors.

/att AlignToTarget=1
When copying an entire drive, use this option to instruct Image for DOS to force
alignment to the target drive regardless of the alignment used on the source drive. For
example, if the /a2k option is also specified the restored drive will be aligned on 1MiB
boundaries.
When copying a single partition, specifying this option will instruct Image for DOS to not
adjust the alignment (1MiB partition alignment will be used if the target has it already or
not if it doesn’t and a partition already exists).
Default if omitted: The alignment used on the target drive will be determined
automatically based on the source drive.

/n2ka N/A
By default, Image for DOS automatically uses 1MiB partition alignment when you copy
from the command line and the source contains 1MiB aligned partitions. Use this option
to instruct Image for DOS not to automatically override normal cylinder-based alignment.
If you don’t enable this option and Image for DOS determines that 1MiB alignment is
needed, then Image for DOS enables both the Align2048 and the AlignEndHS options
for the restore.
Note: This option has been deprecated, but will remain supported for backwards
compatibility. The /att option should be used instead.
Default if omitted. Alignment is automatically determined when copying from the
command line.

/aoe:n AlignOnEnd=n
Place under the [HDx] section

Image for DOS User Manual Page 181 of 218


Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align copied partitions at the end of a
cylinder, or when the Align2048 option is enabled, end of a 1MiB boundary.
0 – Disable align on end
2 – Align on end by resizing
Default if omitted: Normal alignment (/aoe:1) is used.

/a2k Align2048=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to align copied partitions based on 1MiB
boundaries (drives with 512 byte sectors will be aligned on 2048 sectors; drives with
4096 byte sectors will be aligned on 256 sectors).
If this option is enabled then you will normally want to enable the AlignEndHS (/ahs)
option and disable the AlignOnEnd (/aoe:0) option.
Default if omitted. The alignment is based on cylinders.

/av:n AlignVal=n
Place under the [HDx] section
This option allows you to specify a custom partition alignment value for copied
partition(s). For example, to specify that partitions should be aligned on 2MiB
boundaries, use /av:2M or AlignVal=2M. Invalid sizes will be ignored. This option
overrides the other device alignment options.
Default if omitted. This option is not set (a custom alignment value will not be used).

/ahs AlignEndHS=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to force a copied partition’s ending head and
sector values in the MBR to match the current geometry.
Default if omitted. The actual ending head and sector values are used.

/ahst AlignHSOnTrunc=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this option to instruct Image for DOS to set a copied partition’s head and sector
values in the MBR to match the current geometry when it is located outside the range of
the current geometry.
Default if omitted. The actual ending head and sector values are used.

/mg UseMBRGeo=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Set this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use the geometry based on the MBR entry of
the first partition on the source drive.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the geometry of the target drive or the
UseOrgGeo option.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 182 of 218


/og UseOrgGeo=1
Place under the [HDx] section
Set this parameter to tell Image for DOS to use the original geometry of the source drive
based on the environment being used to copy.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the geometry of the target drive.

/c=n c=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter in conjunction with /h and /s to manually specify the cylinder, head,
and sector values for the target drive when you copy. This parameter specifies the last
cylinder, and n is a number you supply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the BIOS-reported values of the drive.

/h=n h=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter in conjunction with /c and /s to manually specify the cylinder, head,
and sector values for the target drive when you copy. This parameter specifies the last
head, and n is a number you supply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the BIOS-reported values of the drive.

/s=n s=n
Place under the [HDx] section
Use this parameter in conjunction with /c and /h to manually specify the cylinder, head,
and sector values for the target drive when you copy. This parameter specifies the last
sector, and n is a number you supply.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS uses the BIOS-reported values of the drive.

/rs:n N/A
Use this parameter to resize a partition after copy. n is the size in MiB’s that you want to
establish for the copied partition. If you try to use this parameter in conjunction with /x,
the Expand option, /x overrides /rs.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS copies the partition without resizing.

/exlist=filename N/A
IMPORTANT NOTE: This option is used at your own risk. Be aware that you’re not
getting a complete image copy.
This option allows you to specify a file which contains a list of paths and/or files to
exclude when copying. The file must be ANSI text and located on the local file system.
FAT, FAT32, and NTFS file systems are supported (the option will be ignored for other
file systems).
The data of the excluded files is not copied – the files will either be deleted or truncated
(depending on the options selected). Note that even though excluded, the data will still
affect the minimum space required to copy (just as if it wasn’t excluded).

Image for DOS User Manual Page 183 of 218


Each line in the exclusion file should be in the following format:
[options]path >
Valid options are:
f - Exclude files only. Do not delete folders. If not specified, folders will be
deleted.
t - Truncate files instead of deleting them. Folders will not be deleted. Files
will have a size of zero bytes.
k - Keep the base folder. If not specified, the base folder will be deleted.
The path can be complete to exclude a specific folder (e.g. \Games) or you can use
wildcards (*, ?) to specify matching files. When excluding a folder, use a trailing
backslash ( \ ) to indicate a folder is specified (otherwise, a search will be made for
matching files). Do not surround the path with quotes even if it includes spaces. Do not
specify a drive letter.
To also exclude files from subdirectories (apply recursion), include the > (greater than)
character after the path.
Examples:
[t]*.jpg - exclude all *.jpg files in the root folder, files will be truncated
\*.iso - exclude all *.iso files in the root folder
\Backups\*.tbi - exclude all *.tbi files in the \Backups folder
[k]\Games\ > - exclude the \Games folder and all sub-folders, keep
the \Games folder (use trailing backslash to indicate folder)
\Work\Archive\ - exclude the \Work\Archive folder, sub-folders not excluded
(use trailing backslash to indicate folder)
*.jpg > - exclude all *.jpg files in the root folder and all sub-folders
[f]\Movies\*.mpg > - exclude all *.mpg files in the \Movies folder and all
sub-folders, folders will not be deleted
\ISO Files\Old\*.iso > - exclude all *.iso files in \ISO Files\Old folder and all
sub-folders
Default if omitted: Image for DOS includes all files when copying the partition (the page
file and hibernation file will be included or excluded per their respective options).

/wco WriteChangedSecsOnly=1
Use this option when copying to write only the changed sectors to the target drive (target
will be read to compare). Useful in cases where a large portion of the data is the same
and it’s desirable to reduce wear on the target drive (e.g. copying partition to SSD drive).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will write all copied sectors normally.

/trim Trim=1
Use this option to TRIM the target area of the copy destination drive prior to performing
the copy operation. This option is only available if the target drive supports TRIM.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not TRIM the target area of drive.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 184 of 218


/unh Unhide=1
Use this option to have Image for DOS unhide partitions that are copied in the hidden
state. If a partition’s hidden state is unsupported it will remain hidden.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not unhide copied hidden partitions.

/hp N/A
Use this option to have Image for DOS set the copied partitions as hidden type partitions
for the drive type (MBR/EMBR/GPT).
Default if omitted: Image for DOS will not change the copied partitions to the hidden
type.

/log:0 SaveLog=0
Disables logging.
Default if omitted: Image for DOS logs during a copy operation.

Image for DOS List Options


Table 10 lists the List parameters you can use when you run Image for DOS from
the command line. There are no INI file variable equivalents for these parameters –
they are only valid on the command line.

Table 10: Image for DOS List Parameters


Command Line Option INI Variable
/L N/A
Use this option to indicate that you want to list the drives and partitions on the system or
those contained in a backup image file. Output can be redirected to a file or viewed
onscreen.
Example 1: image /l /d:0 /stdout:output.txt
In this example, /d:0 identifies hard drive 0 as the drive for which you want to list
partitions and /stdout:output.txt indicates Image for DOS will save the output to
the file output.txt.
Example 2: image /l /all
In this example, a detailed report of all drives and partitions will be shown onscreen.

/d:n N/A
Specifies the drive for which you want to list the partitions, where n = the drive number.
Default if omitted: All drives and partitions are listed.

/opt N/A
List optical drives. Includes drive number and name. Hard drives will not be listed.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 185 of 218


Default if omitted: Optical drives are not listed.

/fs N/A
Include “free space” available for each partition in listing. This option has no affect when
used with /all or /f.
Default if omitted: The amount of “free space” is not listed.

/all N/A
Specify to produce a more detailed report. In addition to the basic information, it
includes:
• Hard drive BIOS Device number, number of Sectors, Sector Size, and CHS
values.
• Partition Start LBA, End LBA, FS ID, PE Flag, Free Sectors, Used Sectors, Last
Used Sector, MBR Entry number, MBR End CHS, and MBR Flag.
• When used with /f, additional “Data Info” is listed, the base image filename is
listed for differential/incremental images, and the file exclusion list (if any) is
listed.
Default if omitted: Only the basic information is listed.

/f N/A
List backup image drive and partition information from the specified backup image file.
Use with /all to obtain more details. It is not necessary to include the .TBI extension with
the file name. The image file description is listed if one exists.
When /all is not specified, no drive information is displayed and the partition information
is limited to the name, size, file system, and ID.
Example:
image /l /all /f:"e:\backups\my backup" /stdout:output.txt
In this example, detailed drive and partition information from the backup image file
e:\backups\my backup.tbi will be saved in output.txt.
Default if omitted: Physical drives and partitions are listed.

Image for DOS Combine Options


Table 11 lists the Combine parameters you can use when you run Image for DOS
from the command line.

Table 11: Image for DOS Combine Parameters


Command Line Option INI Variable
/combine N/A
Use this command to combine differential or incremental images of a backup chain into
a single image file. The newly created image is a full image and can be used as the base

Image for DOS User Manual Page 186 of 218


image for future differential or incremental backups.
The /f parameter is used to specify the file name of the new image file. Use the /base
parameter to specify the starting file to combine (all files from the this file back to the
original base file will be combined).
Optionally, you can specify the /hash option to automatically create the hash file for the
new image file. To remove the combined files, specify the /del option to delete the
original image files combined after the process has finished (the combined image will
assume the location in the chain – dependent image files will still be valid).
In the following examples, a full backup has been created followed by five incremental
backups:
E:\Backups\Win10 Full.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 1.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 2.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 3.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 4.tbi
E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 5.tbi
Running the following command will combine all five incremental backups and the base
full into a new backup image named Win10 Current. The existing incremental files will
not be deleted and a hash file will not be created for the new backup file. (The command
should be on one line.)
image /combine /f:"E:\Backups\Win10 Current"
/base:"E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 5"
Restoring Win10 Current would be the same as restoring Win10 Inc 5.
Running the following command will combine only the first three incremental backups
and the base full into a new backup image named Win10 Base3. The original combined
files will be deleted and a hash file will be created for the new backup file. (The
command should be on one line.)
image /combine /f:"E:\Backups\Win10 Base3"
/base:"E:\Backups\Win10 Inc 3" /del /hash
Restoring Win10 Base3 would be the same as if you restored Win10 Inc 3. The files
Win10 Full through Win10 Inc 3 were deleted. The remaining dependent incremental
files (Win10 Inc 4 & Win10 Inc 5) are still valid, with Win10 Inc 4 now based on the new
Win10 Base3 image.

/f N/A
Use this option to specify the target drive letter, path, and file name for the combined
backup file.
/f:x:\filename x:\ is target drive letter
/f:x:\mypath\filename mypath or my path is path to filename
/f:”x:\my path\file name" filename is target file name for image
Or: Or:
/f:d@p:\filename Specify target device, partition, path, and
file name:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 187 of 218


/f:d@p:\mypath\filename d is target hard drive number
/f:"d@p:\my path\filename” p is target partition ID (hex or decimal
notation)
/f:#ntsig@p:\mypath\filename
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
/f:{GUID}@p:\mypath\filename
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
mypath or my path is path to filename
filename is target file name for image
Device modifiers may be used as needed.
When used, they must be placed after the
/f: and before the target hard drive
number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s)
v – Virtual drive
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

/base N/A
This parameter specifies the starting image file to combine. All image files in the chain
from this file back to the original base file will be combined.
/base:x:\bkup x:\ is source drive letter
/base:x:\mypath\bkup mypath or my path is path to bkup
/base:"x:\my path\bkup" bkup is name of existing backup (omit file
extension)
Or:
Or:
/base:d@p:\bkup
Specify source device, partition, path, and
/base:d@p:\mypath\bkup
file name:
/base:"d@p:\my path\bkup"
d is source hard drive number
/base:#ntsig@p:\mypath\bkup
p is source partition ID (hex or decimal

Image for DOS User Manual Page 188 of 218


/base:{GUID}@p:\mypath\bkup notation)
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID
You can use device modifiers as needed.
When you use them, you must place
them after the /base: and before the
source hard drive number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s)
v – Virtual drive
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

/del:n N/A
Use this option to remove the combined files. After the combine process has finished,
the original image files will be deleted. Use /del:1 (or /del) to delete all the original image
files. Use /del:2 to delete all except the base (full) image file.
Default if omitted: The original image files will not be deleted.

N/A
The following backup parameters can optionally be used when combining images:
/comp - select compression
/enc - encryption and/or password protection
/noej - don’t auto-open optical drive tray
/iobs - adjust I/O performance
/desc - specify image description
/bc - backwards compatible
/md - auto-create target path
/v - validate image
/max - specify maximum file size
/log - logging
/hash - create hash file to speed up differential/incremental backups

Image for DOS User Manual Page 189 of 218


/hdir - output the hash files to a different directory than the image files
/usemd - create metadata hash file to speed up differential/incremental backups
/sch - search path(s) for base or incremental images
/pw - specify password(s)
/opw - specify obfuscated password(s)
/ddm - disable dependent matching when deleting combined images
For more information on the syntax of a specific option please refer to the Image for
DOS Backup Options section on page 140.

Image for DOS Hash Options


Table 11 lists the Hash parameters you can use when you run Image for DOS from
the command line.

Table 11: Image for DOS Hash Parameters


Command Line Option INI Variable
/hash N/A
Use this option to have Image for DOS create a hash file to speed up creating a
Changes Only (differential or incremental) backup. The hash file will be limited to the
max file size and have the same file name as the backup with an extension starting at
.#0 followed by .#1, .#2, etc. as needed.
The /f parameter is used to specify the file name of the existing image file. The /sch
parameter can be used, if necessary, to specify a search path.
For example, running the following command will create a hash file for the backup image
named Win10 Full.
image /hash /f:"E:\Backups\Win10 Full"

/f N/A
Use this option to specify the target drive letter, path, and file name for the backup file for
which the hash file is being created.
/f:x:\filename x:\ is target drive letter
/f:x:\mypath\filename mypath or my path is path to filename
/f:”x:\my path\file name" filename is target file name for image
Or: Or:
/f:d@p:\filename Specify target device, partition, path, and
file name:
/f:d@p:\mypath\filename
d is target hard drive number
/f:"d@p:\my path\filename”
p is target partition ID (hex or decimal
/f:#ntsig@p:\mypath\filename
notation)
/f:{GUID}@p:\mypath\filename
# – NT Disk Signature Follows
{GUID} – GPT Disk GUID

Image for DOS User Manual Page 190 of 218


mypath or my path is path to filename
filename is target file name for image
Device modifiers may be used as needed.
When used, they must be placed after the
/f: and before the target hard drive
number:
b – BIOS access method
d – BIOS (Direct) access method
a – ATA/ATAPI access method
u – USB device
f – IEEE 1394 device
s – Use ASPI
o – Optical drive (when you combine this
option with any of the options mentioned
above, this option must come last; can be
used with a, u, f, and s)
v – Virtual drive
Whether using drive letter or
device/partition, you may specify any path
desired. Paths and/or file names with
imbedded spaces require the use of
quotes.

N/A
The following backup parameters can optionally be used when creating hash files:
/noej - don’t auto-open optical drive tray
/iobs - adjust I/O performance
/log - logging
/hdir - output the hash files to a different directory than the image files
/sch - search path(s) for base or incremental images
/pw - specify password(s)
/opw - specify obfuscated password(s)
For more information on the syntax of a specific option please refer to the Image for
DOS Backup Options section on page 140.

Troubleshooting
If you should encounter any problems while running Image for DOS, please visit our
on-line support page at https://www.terabyteunlimited.com/support-image-for-dos/.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 191 of 218


Appendix A: Understanding the Types of Backups
Many software packages create file-based backups, while Image for DOS creates a
sector-based backup. This section describes both types of backups and their
differences.

File-Based Backup
When you create a file-based backup, you copy files from one storage location to
another using a third-party software package, the built in Microsoft backup utility or
by dragging-and-dropping files and/or folders using Windows Explorer.

Creating a file-based backup is simple, and you can back up or restore only certain
files or folders. But, a file-based backup it has drawbacks. For example, files that
are in use may not be backed up. And, restoring a file-based backup can be tricky
since files in use cannot be restored. Additionally, if the required operating system
environment and software is not installed and accessible, you will first need to
install it before you can restore any data.

Sector-Based Backup
A sector-based backup, also called imaging, differs from file-based backup because
imaging operates on the entire partition, including all files and the operating system
itself. This is the method of backup employed by Image for DOS.

When you create a sector-based image as your backup, you back up not only your
data files but also the operating system, in its entirety. If you restore a sector-based
backup, your computer returns to the state it was in when you created the image.
Image for DOS places all information on the target drive in the exact location where
it appeared when you created the image.

In addition, you can:

* Restore a sector-based backup even if the operating system isn’t accessible—


effectively performing a bare-metal restoration.

* Restore individual files, if you want, using the free TBIView or TBIMount add-
ons.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 192 of 218


Appendix B: Backup Strategies
Whether you create file-based backups or sector-based backups, you can choose
between three different backup methods:

* Full Backups

* Incremental Backups

* Differential Backups

In this section, you will find information that explains each of these backup
methods. The backup method you choose actually affects you most when you need
to restore the backup; some backups are easier to restore than others.

In addition to understanding backup methods, it’s also important to store your


backup media in a safe, secure location. We strongly recommend that you store
your backup media in a different physical location than your computer and that you
place your backup media in a fire-proof safe designed for media. By storing your
backup media offsite, you don’t run the risk of losing both your computer and your
backups in the event of fire or theft. By storing your backups in a fire-proof safe
designed for media, your backups will be protected if a fire occurs at the location
where you store your backups.

Note: Be sure to use a fire-proof safe designed for media because, while paper
doesn't burn until 451 degrees Fahrenheit, media will melt. Computer media may
be damaged at temperatures above 125 degrees Fahrenheit and 80% humidity.

Full Backups
A full backup, as the name implies, involves backing up all specified data.

How Often Should I Back Up?

We hear this question a lot, and there is no right answer. Instead, there is the
answer that works best for you. To figure out how often to back up, ask yourself,
“How much data am I willing to re-enter?” because, once you restore your latest
backup, you will need to re-enter all information since you made that backup.
Many people do not want to re-enter any information, so they back up daily.
Others feel their computer usage is such that they are willing to back up once
each week and re-enter up to seven days worth of data. Decide how much data
you are willing to re-enter and set your backup schedule accordingly.

Incremental Backups
Incremental backups include only data that has changed since the most recent
backup was performed—whether the most recent backup was a full backup or a
previous incremental backup. To use this backup method, you perform a full backup
at an interval of your choice—say every two weeks. In between full backups, you

Image for DOS User Manual Page 193 of 218


perform incremental backups. If you need to restore your entire system, you need
to restore the latest full backup followed by each of the incremental backups you
performed since that full backup (unless the backup program being used supports a
complete restore in one restore procedure).

For example, suppose that you are relying on file-based backups, and you perform
a full backup that includes FILE1, FILE2, and FILE3. Then, you change FILE2, and
you perform an incremental backup. This incremental backup will include only the
data of FILE2, since you did not change the other files in the most recent full
backup. Then, if you change FILE3 and add FILE4 and make another incremental
backup, the latest incremental backup will include only data from FILE3 and FILE4.

If you are relying on sector-based backups, you perform a full backup at an interval
of your choice and, in between, you perform incremental backups. But, an
incremental sector-based backup is not based on files that have been added or
changed. Instead, an incremental sector-based backup looks for and includes
newly allocated sectors and changes to the contents of any sector since the last
backup. Suppose that you move a file without changing its contents. In a sector-
based backup, the sector reallocation caused by moving the file is a change that
will be included in the next incremental backup, even though you didn’t change the
file itself.

Note: Although defragmenting the file system does not change file content, it can
lead to many sector-level changes because defragmenting files moves them from
one disk location to another.

Incremental backups are hard to properly manage and tend to be troublesome


during disaster recovery. While trying to recover from a disaster, it is not uncommon
to discover that an incremental backup is either lost or damaged, making all
subsequent incremental backups worthless. In addition, if you accidentally restore
incremental backups in the wrong order, the problems you experience may not
manifest themselves until some future date, at which point recovery can become
almost impossible.

Differential Backups
Differential backups include only data that has changed since the most recent full
backup was performed. To use this method, you make a full backup at an interval of
your choice. In between full backups, you perform differential backups, which
include all data that has changed since the last full backup. If you need to restore
your entire system, you need to restore the latest full backup followed by the latest
differential backup (unless the backup program being used supports a complete
restore in one restore procedure). Unlike incremental backups, which rely on every
other incremental backup in the chain, a differential backup relies only on the full
backup.

For example, suppose that you are relying on file-based backups and you perform a
full backup that includes FILE1, FILE2, and FILE3. Then, you change FILE2, and
you perform a differential backup. This differential backup will include only the data
of FILE2, since the other files in the most recent full backup have not changed. If

Image for DOS User Manual Page 194 of 218


you then change FILE3 and perform another differential backup, this differential
backup will include data from both FILE2 and FILE3.

A differential sector-based backup includes any sector that has changed or been
allocated since you created the last full backup.

Differential backups are easy to manage during disaster recovery because you
need to restore only the last full backup followed by the last differential backup
(some programs will restore both the full and differential backup in one restore
procedure). You don’t run as much risk of discovering that a backup is damaged or
missing, and since you only need to restore two backups (at most), you are not as
likely to restore them in the wrong order.

By its nature, the size of a differential backup grows over time. If you wait long
enough between full backups, your differential backup could become almost as
large as a full backup, and take almost as much time to create.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 195 of 218


Appendix C: Introduction to Hard Drive Storage
Most modern personal computers make use of at least one partitioned hard drive or
solid state drive (SSD). Knowing at least the basics of how drive partitioning and file
systems work can help you understand how to work with TeraByte Unlimited
imaging products. The information about physical hard drives that follows is
intended to be a broad overview to provide you with a general understanding of the
hard drive.

The Physical Hard Drive


Hard drives contain several round, thin, rigid disks called platters. The rigidity of
these platters serves as the basis for the terms “hard disk” and “hard drive”. In the
center of each platter is a hole by which the platter is mounted to a spindle. The
platters rotate around this spindle at high speed (typically 5,400 to 10,000 rotations
per minute, or RPM).

Internal view of a hard drive in operation. The arm appears blurred due to its rapid movement.
Photo courtesy of Michael Blessenohl

The Logical Hard Drive—Hard Drive Data Organization


Data is organized on the platters of hard drives in the form of tracks and sectors,
which are established during manufacturing. The tracks, which exist on each side of
each platter, are concentric circles. Sectors are defined by radial lines that go from
the center point of the platter to the outer edge.

When you set up a hard drive, you can create logical partitions. A logical partition is
simply a conceptual division on the hard disk. You can use different file systems in
different partitions, and many users partition hard disks so that they can store
different operating systems or segregate data on the same hard drive. If you set up
different partitions so that you can use different operating and file systems, you can

Image for DOS User Manual Page 196 of 218


use Terabyte’s BootIt UEFI or BootIt Bare Metal to select the operating system in
which you want to work each time you boot your computer.

Formatting is the process that prepares a partition on the hard disk to accept data
by creating an empty file system that is organized into clusters. A cluster, a logical
grouping of contiguous sectors, is the smallest logical unit of storage that you can
allocate to hold a file’s data.

Figures 1 through 3 depict the layout of files within clusters on a hypothetical


partition. In each figure shown, 44 clusters contain data. In Figure 1, the last cluster
in use (that is, the one closest to the bottom/right) is at the very end of the partition.

Figure 1

The location of this last cluster at the time that you create an image determines the
minimum amount of free space that must be available on the hard drive to which
you intend to restore—called the target drive.

Note: If you are restoring a partition with an image created using raw mode, or if
the partition uses an unrecognized file system, the target drive needs to be equal
to the full size of the source partition, regardless of cluster allocation.

Figure 2 shows the same number of clusters in use, but the last cluster in use is
located in the fifth row, rather than at the very end of the partition:

Figure 2

Image for DOS User Manual Page 197 of 218


Although Figure 1 and Figure 2 depict the exact same number of used clusters,
the location of the last used cluster in Figure 2 allows you to restore an image of
that partition to a much smaller target because, when an image is restored, each
cluster is placed in a location on the target that is identical, relatively speaking, to its
original location on the drive you imaged—called the source drive.

Note: You can use the Compact and Compact Data features of the Terabyte
Unlimited imaging programs to reduce the size required when restoring or
copying.

Figure 3 shows the same number of clusters in use, but the clusters are arranged
optimally, with no unused clusters interspersed.

Figure 3

Although the used cluster arrangement of Figure 3 might be most ideal, you
generally can’t easily arrange clusters in this way.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 198 of 218


Appendix D: Restoring to a Smaller Drive or
Partition
Despite ever increasing hard drive sizes, many users find themselves in situations
requiring them to move to a smaller drive. The difficulty level of this process depends on
a number of factors, including the method used and the details of the particular
configuration. This appendix presents several methods to accomplish this task and,
hopefully, provide a trouble-free transition.

Typical reasons to move to a smaller drive or partition include:

• Moving the OS partition to a faster drive (e.g. going from a 1TB hard drive to a
256GB SSD)
• Segregating the OS from data (e.g. splitting a single 950GB partition into a
100GB OS partition and a 850GB data partition).
• Splitting a RAID 0 setup into single drives
• Migrating to a new physical system or to or from a virtual system
• Emergency recovery using parts on hand
• Testing recovery scenarios

Methods to Try First


The TeraByte imaging programs have several options available to aid restoring or
copying to a smaller drive or partition. In many cases, using one or more of these
options is enough to allow the successful completion of the operation.

Note: Using these options assumes the actual amount of used space on the source
image/drive can actually fit on the destination drive. If this is not the case, or you try
these methods and the imaging program reports there's not enough free space
available, proceed with this article and determine the steps required (e.g. reducing the
required space amount).

• If restoring an entire drive image or copying an entire drive:

o Use the Scale to Fit option.

o If the source partitions (those being restored or copied) have free space
between them (partitions not contiguous), also use the Remove Gaps on
Restore or Remove Gaps on Copy option.

o If there is still not enough free space available, use the Compact Data
option. This will compact FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions during the restore
(or copy) operation to fit in the smallest space required to hold the data.
Note: A clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent a
resize from succeeding will result in a failed operation.

• If restoring or copying a single partition:

Image for DOS User Manual Page 199 of 218


o Try restoring or copying the partition to the destination. If possible, the
partition will automatically be resized smaller to fit.
o If the selected destination isn't large enough for a normal restore or copy,
use the Compact Data option. Use the Compact Data option. This will
compact FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions during the restore (or copy)
operation to fit in the smallest space required to hold the data. Note: A
clean file system is required. File system errors that prevent a resize from
succeeding will result in a failed operation.

Procedure Summary
The basic steps are as follows:

1. Determine the minimum space required to restore the partition(s)

If the source partition contains more data than can fit on the new smaller partition
it will be necessary to delete files or move files to a different drive.

When moving an entire drive to a smaller drive, you will need to check space
requirements for each partition on the source drive.

2. Check the file system for errors

Run chkdsk /f on the source partition(s) to check for file system errors. Errors
can cause compacting and resizing to fail. Note: You may want to run
MEMTEST86 before chkdsk if RAM integrity is unknown.

Checking the file system isn’t an option if you will be restoring directly from an
existing image using the Compact Data option. In that case, just be aware that
any errors may prevent the resize from succeeding. (See Appendix B of the
corresponding TeraByte KB article for an example using TBIHD to check the file
system on partitions in an image.)

3. Compact or resize the partition(s)

At this point, you have several choices:

a. If restoring from an image, perform a normal restore operation using the


Compact Data* option to resize the partition(s) during the operation (no need
to compact first and create a new image).

b. Perform a normal copy operation using the Compact Data* option to resize
the partition(s) during the operation (no need to compact the source partitions
first).

c. Use the compact feature in the imaging programs to reduce the minimum
required size or use BootIt to resize the source partition smaller. In either
case, use a size less than that of the new smaller partition.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 200 of 218


When moving an entire drive to a smaller drive, you may need to compact or
resize multiple source partitions.

*Note: The Compact Data option is only supported on FAT/FAT32/NTFS


partitions and requires a clean file system. File system errors that prevent the
resize from succeeding will result in the destination partition being deleted (the
data is not usable).

4. Create a backup image of the drive or partition

Once the source partition or drive is ready (files moved, partitions compacted, file
systems checked, etc.), create a backup image. Skip this step if you will be
copying the source partition(s) or drive to the smaller drive.

5. Restore the image (or Copy) to the new location

When restoring or copying a partition, specify the desired new smaller size. If
restoring a drive image or copying an entire drive, use one of the scale options,
such as Scale to Fit. It may also be necessary to use the Remove Gaps on
Restore or Remove Gaps on Copy option.

For more specific details on restoring to a smaller drive or partition as well as several
example scenarios, please continue reading.

Preparing for the Move


Depending upon the specifics of the move and which method will be used, it’s possible
extensive changes will be made to the existing data – file systems resized or compacted,
data deleted, programs uninstalled, file systems repaired, and so on. It is recommended
to create a backup image of the drive before proceeding if data safety or the ability to
return to the present state is important to you.

As an example, you may be moving from a 500GB Windows drive to a 128GB SSD. You
plan to delete many gigabytes of files you won’t need and uninstall several large
programs. However, you would also like to preserve the data on the 500GB drive. One
way to do this is to create a backup image of the drive and then make the desired
changes. A new backup image can then be created and restored to the SSD (or the
drive could be copied). Once the SSD is ready for use, the original drive image can be
restored to the 500GB source drive, returning it to its original state.

Understanding Partition Data Organization

When you set up a hard drive, you can create logical partitions. A logical partition is
simply a conceptual division on the hard drive. You can use different file systems in
different partitions, and many users partition hard drives so that they can store different
operating systems or segregate data on the same hard drive.

Formatting is the process that prepares a partition on the hard drive to accept data by
creating an empty file system that is organized into clusters. A cluster, a logical grouping
of contiguous sectors, is the smallest logical unit of storage that you can allocate to hold
a file’s data.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 201 of 218


Table A depicts the layout of files within clusters on a hypothetical partition. 44 clusters
contain data, with the last cluster in use (the cluster closest to the end of the partition)
being located 75% into the partition.

Table A Table B

By default, the location of the last cluster at the time that you create an image
determines the minimum amount of free space that must be available on the hard drive
to which you intend to restore. In this example, assuming the partition size was 100GB,
you would not be able to restore it to a space smaller than 75GB.

Table B is a representation of the partition after being compacted. It contains the same
number of used clusters with no unused clusters interspersed. As a result, an image of
this partition can be restored to a much smaller destination.

Compacting and resizing are both operations that allow you to relocate the data in the
partition while maintaining its integrity. Compacting leaves the partition size unchanged
and moves the data so it fits the smaller specified size. Resizing a partition smaller is
similar to compacting, but also reduces the size of the partition.

More information on this subject can be found in Error! Reference source not found..

Determining the Space Required

When determining the minimum space required to restore a partition it's important to
understand that, by default, the TeraByte imaging programs restore the partition image
as an actual image. As explained in the previous section, this requires the same space
for the data as the source partition since the restored data is not relocated within the
destination partition while being written. Any resizing of the restored partition takes place
after the restore has completed. This behavior can be changed when restoring or
copying FAT/FAT32/NTFS partitions by using the Compact Data option to compact the
data during the procedure instead of requiring it to be performed beforehand.

The minimum space required to restore a partition can be determined from the source
partition, from the image file, or by attempting to restore the partition image. Keep in
mind that the actual minimum space required depends on the method used to perform
the restore or copy operation. If doing a normal restore or copy the MIB/GIB to Restore
value is required. If doing a restore or copy using the Compact Data option the MiB/GiB
Used value is required. Please note that these values represent the data only –

Image for DOS User Manual Page 202 of 218


operating systems may require an additional minimal amount of free space in order to
function correctly.

To Check the Source Partition:

1. Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice and select to create a
backup.
2. Proceed though the steps until you get to the screen where you select which
partitions to include.
3. Highlight the partition and click the Information button in Image for Windows,
Image for DOS GUI, and Image for Linux GUI, or press F1 in Image for Windows
(Console), Image for DOS, and Image for Linux.
4. Along with other details, the number of MiB/GiB Used and MiB/GIB to Restore
are displayed.

To Check an Existing Image File from the Program Interface:

1. Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice and select to restore a
backup.
2. Proceed though the steps until you get to the screen where you select which
partition(s) to restore.
3. Highlight the partition to check and click the Information button in Image for
Windows, Image for DOS GUI, and Image for Linux GUI, or press F1 in Image for
Windows (Console), Image for DOS, and Image for Linux.
4. Along with other details, the number of MiB/GiB Used and MiB/GIB to Restore
are displayed.

To Check an Existing Image File from the Command-line:

Run the TeraByte imaging program of your choice from the Command Prompt and
specify the /L, /ALL, and /F options. Program output can be redirected to a file for easy
reference.

• Using Image for Windows, Image for Windows (Console), or Image for DOS

1. If running in Windows, start an Administrator Command Prompt.


2. Change to the folder containing imagew.exe, imagewc.exe, or
image.exe.
3. Run the command (Image for Windows is used below):
imagew /l /all /f:"e:\backups\my backup" > output.txt
This will obtain all the partition information from the
e:\backups\my backup.tbi image and save it to a file named output.txt
in the same folder as imagew.exe.

If using Image for Windows (Console) or Image for DOS you can view the

Image for DOS User Manual Page 203 of 218


output onscreen by not redirecting it. For example:
imagewc /l /all /f:"e:\backups\my backup"

• Using Image for Linux from the IFL Boot Media

1. Boot to the IFL CD. If necessary, mount the partition or network share
that contains the backup image file. Use the Mount Network Shares
menu option or exit to the Command Prompt and use dpmount.
2. Select the Exit To Command Prompt menu option. By default the
current path is the one which contains imagel (/tbu).
3. Run the command:
imagel -l --all --f "mnt1/backups/my backup" > output.txt

This will obtain all the partition information from the


mnt1/backups/my backup.tbi image and save it to a file named
output.txt in the same folder as imagel. Note: The output.txt file may
contain escape code sequences as well as the partition data and may
look strange in a text editor.

Output can also be viewed onscreen by not redirecting it:


imagel -l --all --f "mnt1/backups/my backup"

Use Shift-PgUp and Shift-PgDn to scroll through the output. If the console
buffer is too small to let you view all the information you will most likely
need to redirect it to a file.

Examine the output and find the details of the partition you’re going to restore. The Last
Used Sector value determines the minimum space required to restore the partition if the
Compact Data option is not used. The Used Sectors value is the minimum space
required for just the data.

For additional information on using this method, please see the corresponding TeraByte
KB article.

To Check by Attempting to Restore the Partition Image:

Note: This method is included for completeness only.

1. Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice and select to do a normal
restore of the partition.
2. Select the destination partition or free space area and click Next.
3. At this point, depending on the specifics of the partition, a notice with the number
of MiBs required may be displayed if the destination is too small (if you must
know the minimum size and the notice is not displayed, you can select a very
small partition or one you know is too small as the target).
Important Note: When restoring or copying a partition, any unallocated space
located adjacent to the destination partition will be included in the available size.
For example, if the drive contains a 10GB partition and has 25GB of free space

Image for DOS User Manual Page 204 of 218


adjacent to it, you could successfully restore a partition image that requires 30GB
to the 10GB partition. The restored partition will begin at whichever location is
located towards the beginning of the drive. For example, if the free space is
located before the partition, the restored partition begins where the unallocated
space begins.
Disk images and partitions that would fit if compacted are treated differently –
you will not be notified if the image won’t fit after selecting the destination
drive/partition. Instead, you must proceed to the options screen and click Next.
The reason for this is that alignment options, one of the scaling options (Scale to
Fit or Scale to Target), or compaction (Compact Data) may be used, which could
change the requirements. The actual space necessary cannot be determined
until the state of all options are known.
Note: Mounting an image with TBIMount will not allow you to obtain the minimum
size required for a restore.

Removing Unwanted Programs and Files

Once you have determined the space that will required to restore or copy to the new
smaller drive or partition, you’ll know how much data will need to be removed to allow it
to fit. In many cases, this will require deleting large data files (archives, ISO downloads,
installers, videos, music, etc.). You may also need to uninstall certain programs,
planning to reinstall them to a different partition when needed.

It should be noted that deleting files from a partition may not lower the minimum required
size to restore the partition if the Compact Data option is not used since data may still
exist at previous furthest “in use” location on the partition. Check the space required
after deleting files to determine the current size.

If moving to an extremely small drive (like a small SSD), you will likely need to remove
almost everything that isn’t part of the standard Windows installation. In these cases,
you may want to consider the option of installing Windows to the new drive and starting
over fresh.

Make Sure the File System is Clean

Whether restoring to a smaller drive or to a smaller partition, file system errors on any of
the source partitions can cause numerous errors, including failure to resize or compact
the partition. If you are unsure of the condition of the file system, you may want to run
chkdsk /f on it before imaging or copying it. In general, it’s a good idea to run
MEMTEST86 before running chkdsk (bad memory may cause chkdsk to corrupt the
partition).

To run chkdsk this, open a Command Prompt (an Administrator Command Prompt is
required in versions of Windows with UAC is enabled) and run the following command,
making sure to use the correct drive letter for the partition to be checked:

chkdsk c: /f

Note that checking some partitions, such as the Windows partition, may require
Windows to restart. In the case of multiple partitions needing to be checked it may be

Image for DOS User Manual Page 205 of 218


advantageous to check them from WinRE/PE (e.g. TBWinRE or TBWinPE) – since
Windows isn’t running and no partitions are locked, restarts will not be required.

Compact or Resize the Partition(s)

Compacting or resizing a partition requires that it be available to be modified. If the only


source of the desired partition is an image backup and it fails to restore properly using
the Compact Data option (or is unsupported), you would generally first restore the image
to a drive large enough to contain it so it can be checked (if necessary), compacted (or
resized) and then reimaged or copied. The backup can be restored to a virtual disk if a
physical disk is not readily available. Once the partitions have been compacted a new
image backup can be created from the virtual disk or a copy operation can be performed
using the virtual disk as the source. It may also be possible to load the image using
TBIHD and make the changes (see Appendix B of the corresponding TeraByte KB
article for an example).

Also note that you can’t compact a partition that’s in use (for example, you can’t compact
the booted Windows partition). You would need to boot to Image for DOS, Image for
Linux, or Image for Windows (e.g. TBWinRE or TBWinPE).

To compact a partition:

1. Start the TeraByte imaging program of your choice.


2. Select to create a backup.
3. On the partition selection screen highlight the partition that needs compacted.
4. Click the Compact button (graphical versions) or press F3 (console versions).
5. Enter the new size.

To resize a partition:

1. Boot into BootIt UEFI or BootIt Bare Metal or Image for Linux GUI (to use
Partition Work).
2. Enter Partition Work.
3. Select the partition than needs resized.
4. Click the Resize button.
5. Click OK to check the file system for errors.
6. Enter the new size and then click OK.

The time required to compact or resize a partition depends on the amount of data that
must be moved and the speed of the system.

Examples
Several examples of restoring to a smaller drive or partition are shown below:

• Example 1 – Normal Restore


• Example 2 – Restore using “Compact Data”
• Example 3 – Compact/Resize, Image, and Restore

Image for DOS User Manual Page 206 of 218


For more details and additional methods using the TBOSDT copywin.tbs script and
robocopy, please see the corresponding TeraByte KB article.

Unless otherwise stated, the examples below are using the following base system
configuration:

• The source drive is 500GB with a single 465GB partition containing Windows and
150GB of programs and data.
• The source drive’s required space for restore is 220GB.
• A backup image of the source drive has been created (SOURCE.TBI).
• The destination drive is either a 128GB, 180GB, or 256GB SSD.

Example 1 – Normal Restore

For the purpose of this text, a “normal restore” is one which requires no compacting,
resizing, or special steps to accomplish prior to restoring. This type of restore can be
used any time the required space for the restore is less than the available space on the
destination drive – even if the source partition is actually much larger. In the case of a
single partition, a normal restore (or copy) will automatically attempt to resize to the
smaller space.

Using the example configuration, SOURCE.TBI can be restored normally to the 256GB
SSD since it requires only 220GB. It would not be possible to do a normal restore to the
128GB SSD due to insufficient available space.

When restoring an OS partition or disk image (entire drive), any standard options
necessary to ensure proper booting would also apply here (Set Active, Update
BOOT.INI, Update Boot Partition, Restore First Track, etc.). Additionally, when restoring
a disk image and the source drive was larger than the destination, the Scale to Target or
Scale to Fit option must be selected. Otherwise, the program will report that there’s not
enough space on the destination drive even if there is.

Example 2 – Restore using “Compact Data”

This type of restore is just like the normal restore in Example 1 except the Compact Data
option is used.

Using the example configuration, SOURCE.TBI can be restored to the 180GB SSD
since it requires only 150GB for the data. It would not be possible to do a restore to the
180GB SSD without using Compact Data since that would require 220GB of space.

When restoring an OS partition or disk image (entire drive), any standard options
necessary to ensure proper booting would also apply here (Set Active, Update
BOOT.INI, Update Boot Partition, Restore First Track, etc.). Additionally, when restoring
a disk image and the source drive was larger than the destination, the Scale to Target or
Scale to Fit option must be selected. Otherwise, the program will report that there’s not
enough space on the destination drive even if there is.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 207 of 218


Example 3 – Compact/Resize, Image, and Restore

Using the example configuration, restoring an image of the 465GB partition to the
128GB SSD could be performed as follows:

Using Compact:

1. Move 100GB of data files to a USB drive to bring the total used space down to
around 70GB.
2. Boot to Image for Linux and select to create a backup.
3. Select the 465GB Windows partition.
4. Make sure the 465GB Windows partition is highlighted and use the Compact
option (press F3).
5. Specify a size of 100GB.
6. After the compaction completes, continue with creating the image of the partition.
7. Restore this image to the 128GB SSD, specifying to resize it to use all available
free space. When restoring an OS partition, any standard options necessary to
ensure proper booting would also apply here (Set Active, Update BOOT.INI,
Update Boot Partition, etc.) – just as with a normal restore.

Using Resize:

1. Move 100GB of data files to a USB drive to bring the total used space down to
around 70GB.
2. Use a partitioning program (such as BootIt) and resize the 465GB partition to
100GB.
3. Boot to Image for Linux and select to create a backup.
4. Select the 100GB Windows partition and create an image of it.
5. Restore this image to the 128GB SSD, specifying to resize it to use all available
free space. When restoring an OS partition, any standard options necessary to
ensure proper booting would also apply here (Set Active, Update BOOT.INI,
Update Boot Partition, etc.) – just as with a normal restore.

Either method will accomplish the same results. You may end up compacting some
partitions and resizing others depending on the particular need at the time.

Once a partition has been compacted or resized an alternative method would be to copy
it directly instead of imaging and restoring.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 208 of 218


Glossary

Hard Drive (HD, HDD)


A high-capacity, non-volatile, data storage device. Hard drives are typically installed
inside a computer. In addition, they are used in many external devices, connected
via USB, eSATA, etc.

Partition
A unique area of a hard drive that is allocated for use by a file system. A hard drive
can contain many partitions.

File System
An organized structure that allows data to be stored and accessed by a filename.
You can basically think of it as the filing system used by the operating system to
store and retrieve your data. On a hard drive, the file system almost always resides
in a partition.

Volume
Generally, a volume is considered to be any file system or device that is used to
hold data, but, when using Image for DOS, it also represents a specific partition that
resides in an extended partition.

Extended Partition
A special type of partition that is divided in to one or more partitions called volumes.

Drive Letter
A single letter that represents a file system in Microsoft operating systems. Since a
file system on a hard drive is almost always in a partition or volume, it also
represents a partition or volume.

Logical Drive
A term used in Microsoft operating systems to describe the specific drive letters that
point to volumes. In practical terms, it is the same thing as a drive letter.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 209 of 218


Source
When backing up, “source” refers to the hard drive that you want to back up. When
restoring, “source” refers to the location on a storage medium that contains a
backup you want to restore.

Target
When backing up, “target” refers to the location on a storage medium (usually
CD/DVD discs, a hard drive partition, or an external hard drive) where you want to
store a backup. When restoring, “target” refers to the location on a hard drive where
you want to restore a backup you previously created. A restore target can either be
an area of free space or a partition. In the latter case, the partition—and any
information it contains—will be deleted immediately prior to the restore.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 210 of 218


What is Shareware?
Shareware distribution provides users with the opportunity to try software before
buying it. If you try a Shareware program and continue using it, you are expected to
register it. Individual programs differ on details; some request registration, others
require it, and some specify a maximum trial period. When you register the
software, you may receive anything from the right to continue using the software to
an updated program with printed manual.

Shareware is a distribution method, not a type of software. Because you can try
shareware before you buy, you can easily determine if a particular piece of software
will fill your needs. Also, because the overhead is low, prices are low. Shareware
has the ultimate money-back guarantee—if you don't use the product, you don't pay
for it.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 211 of 218


TeraByte Unlimited (Trial-Use) License Agreement
If you are using the software for evaluation or trial purposes then this license applies to
you:

PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY


By using, copying, transmitting, distributing or installing all or any part of the TeraByte trial version computer software and
documentation accompanying this License Agreement (the "Evaluation Software"), you agree to all of the terms and
conditions of this License Agreement.

Please read the license terms and conditions below. If you do not agree to all of the terms and conditions, then do not
use, copy, transmit, distribute, or install the trial version computer software and documentation accompanying this license
Agreement.

TeraByte, Inc., dba TeraByte Unlimited ("TeraByte") and/or its suppliers own the Evaluation Software and its
documentation, which are protected under applicable copyright, trade secrets, and other laws. Your rights and license to
use the programs and the documentation are limited to the terms and subject to the conditions set forth below.

1. LICENSE:

(a) TRIAL USE IN YOUR OWN COMPUTER

(i) YOU MAY: use the Evaluation Software for evaluation purposes in your own computer, for a period not to
exceed thirty (30) days after your first installation or use of the Evaluation Software. You may not re-install or additionally
install the Evaluation Software for additional evaluation periods.

(ii) Not "Free Software". This Evaluation Software is not "free software", but a software copy with limited
license rights, as set forth in this Agreement.

(iii) Temporary Evaluation Use Only. You may use this Evaluation Software without charge for a limited time
only, and solely to decide whether to purchase a paid license for the software from TeraByte. If you wish to use the
Evaluation Software after the thirty (30) day evaluation period, then you must purchase a Full Use license for the software
from TeraByte. You can visit TeraByte's web site at www.terabyteunlimited.com, for further information.

(iv) NO CONTINUED USE WITHOUT REGISTRATION. Unregistered use of the Evaluation Software after the
thirty (30) day trial period is an infringement of TeraByte's legal and equitable rights, including but not limited to copyright
and trade secret rights, under U.S. and international laws.

(v) Notwithstanding the above, should you use, install, copy, or download the Evaluation Software for a
particular purpose, and should the Evaluation Software successfully accomplish that particular purpose, such use shall
not be considered evaluation purposes. In such case, you shall immediately obtain the appropriate end user license.

(b) LIMITED DISTRIBUTION LICENSE

(i) IF YOU ARE AN INDIVIDUAL, YOU MAY: distribute copies of the Evaluation Software to your friends or
associates, provided that you charge no fees nor request any donations for this service, and that you convey only a
complete and unaltered copy of the original Evaluation Software files, in the exact form that they were downloaded from
www.terabyteunlimited.com.

(ii) ALL OTHER DISTRIBUTION is allowed only under the terms set forth by TeraByte, if any, at the
www.terabyteunlimited.com web site. TeraByte may, at its sole discretion, append a data record to the distribution files
for the Evaluation Software, in which event such data record shall be automatically incorporated by reference. Any
distribution satisfying all of the distribution requirements expressed at the web site or in that data record, if any, is hereby
authorized; all other distribution requires TeraByte's advance written approval.

(iii) Each individual, and each vendor, wishing to distribute the Evaluation Software package must
independently satisfy all terms of the limited distribution license.

(iv) You may make as many copies of this Evaluation Software as you need, for purposes of the limited
distribution permitted in this Agreement.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 212 of 218


(v) TERABYTE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO RETRACT OR CHANGE ANY OR ALL OF THE ABOVE
DISTRIBUTION RIGHTS AT ANY TIME, FOR ANY OR NO REASON.

(c) YOU MAY NOT:

(i) permit others to use the Evaluation Software unless they are properly licensed by TeraByte, either under this
Agreement or another agreement from TeraByte;

(ii) modify, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or create derivative works based on, the
Evaluation Software;

(iii) copy the Evaluation Software except as expressly permitted above;

(iv) distribute the Evaluation Software, bundle it with other products, rent, lease, sell, grant a security interest in,
or otherwise transfer rights to, or possession of, the Evaluation Software or any copy thereof, except as may be expressly
provided in this Agreement;

(v) remove or alter any proprietary notices, labels or legends on any copy of the Evaluation Software; or

(vi) ship or transmit (directly or indirectly) any copies of the Evaluation Software or their media, or any direct
product thereof, to any country or destination prohibited by the United States Government.

(d) RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. All rights and licenses not expressly granted by TeraByte in this Agreement are entirely
and exclusively reserved to TeraByte.

2. TERM AND TERMINATION: This Agreement shall remain effective until this Agreement is terminated, provided that in
no event shall your evaluation rights hereunder extend beyond the thirty (30) day period set forth in Section 1 above. You
may terminate it at any time by destroying the distribution media together with all of your copies of the Evaluation
Software in any form. This Agreement will also automatically terminate, without notice, if you fail to comply fully with any
term or condition of this Agreement, or if your normal business operations are disrupted or discontinued for more than
thirty days by reason of insolvency, bankruptcy, receivership, or business termination. Upon termination of this
Agreement, you must destroy all copies of the Evaluation Software in any form.

3. OWNERSHIP AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION: TeraByte or its licensors own the Evaluation Software under
copyright, trade secret and all other laws that may apply. All product names, designs, and logos associated with the
Evaluation Software are trademarks of TeraByte. The source code of the Evaluation Software and all information
regarding the design, structure or internal operation of the Evaluation Software are valuable trade secrets of TeraByte or
third parties with which TeraByte has licensing arrangements ("Confidential Information"), provided however, that
"Confidential Information" shall not include information which otherwise would be Confidential Information to the extent
that such information was publicly known or otherwise known to you previously to the time of disclosure, which
subsequently became known through no act or omission by you, or which otherwise became known to you other than
through disclosure by TeraByte. You shall not sell, transfer, publish, disclose, display or otherwise permit access to any
Confidential Information by any third party, nor may you use any of the Confidential Information, except strictly as part of
the Evaluation Software in the form originally distributed by TeraByte.

4. LIMITED WARRANTY: THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ENTIRELY "AS-IS". TERABYTE MAKES NO
WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE, ITS
MERCHANTABILITY, OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. TERABYTE DOES NOT WARRANT
THAT THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE
EVALUATION SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY
FOR SELECTING AND USING THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE, AND THAT IF YOU USE THE EVALUATION
SOFTWARE IMPROPERLY OR AGAINST INSTRUCTIONS, YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO YOUR FILES,
SOFTWARE, DATA OR BUSINESS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
EVALUATION SOFTWARE IS BORNE BY YOU. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL
PART OF THE AGREEMENT. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusions of an implied warranty, so this disclaimer may
not apply to you and you may have other legal rights that vary by jurisdiction.

5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. ANY LIABILITY OF TERABYTE WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT


REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE. IN ADDITION, IN NO EVENT WILL TERABYTE, NOR ANY
OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THE EVALUATION
SOFTWARE, BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES WHATSOEVER,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF INCOME, USE OR INFORMATION, RELATING EITHER TO THE USE
OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE, OR YOUR RELATIONSHIP WITH TERABYTE, EVEN IF TERABYTE HAS BEEN
ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS. Any suit or other legal action relating
in any way to this Agreement or to the Evaluation Software must be filed or commenced no later than one (1) year after it
accrues. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 213 of 218


6. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. The Evaluation Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended
for use on equipment or software running in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, including but not
limited to the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the Evaluation Software could contribute to death, personal
injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). TERABYTE AND ITS SUPPLIERS
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS OF THE EVALUATION
SOFTWARE FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. TERABYTE DOES NOT AUTHORIZE USE OF THE EVALUATION
SOFTWARE FOR ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY. YOU AGREE TO DEFEND AND INDEMNIFY TERABYTE, AND HOLD
TERABYTE HARMLESS, FROM AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, ACTIONS, LOSSES, COSTS JUDGMENTS
AND DAMAGES OF ANY KIND IN CONNECTION WITH USE IN RELATION TO ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY OF ANY
COPY OF THE EVALUATION SOFTWARE RELATING TO THIS LICENSE.

7. RESTRICTED RIGHTS - COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE. The parties acknowledge and agree that: (a) any
and all products covered by this Agreement are, and shall be, deemed "commercial computer software" for all purposes in
relation to U.S. government acquisition laws, rules and regulations, and (b) all use, duplication and disclosure by, for, or
on behalf of the U.S. Government is subject to all conditions, limitations and restrictions applicable to "commercial
computer software" as set forth in FAR section 12.212 and in DFAR sections 227.7202-1, 227.7202-3, and 227.7202-4.

8. GENERAL.

(a) ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between you and TeraByte in regard to the
subject matter herein, and supersedes all previous and contemporaneous agreements, proposals and communications,
written or oral between you and TeraByte. No amendment of this Agreement shall be effective unless it is in writing and
signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties.

(b) NON-WAIVER. Waiver by TeraByte of any violation of any provision of this License shall not be deemed to waive any
further or future violation of the same or any other provision.

(c) LAW AND JURISDICTION. This License and any dispute relating to the Evaluation Software or to this License shall
be governed by the laws of the United States and the laws of the State of Nevada, without regard to U.S. or Nevada
choice of law rules. You agree and consent that jurisdiction and proper venue for all claims, actions and proceedings of
any kind relating to TeraByte or the matters in this License shall be exclusively in courts located in Las Vegas, Nevada. If
a court with the necessary subject matter jurisdiction over a given matter cannot be found in Las Vegas, then jurisdiction
for that matter shall be exclusively in a court with the proper jurisdiction as close to Las Vegas as possible, and within
Nevada if possible.

(d) SEVERABILITY. If any part or provision of this License is held to be unenforceable for any purpose, including but not
limited to public policy grounds, then you agree that the remainder of the License shall be fully enforceable as if the
unenforceable part or provision never existed.

(e) NON-ASSIGNMENT. You may not assign this License without the prior written consent of TeraByte, except as part of
a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of your business.

(f) NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES. There are no third party beneficiaries of any promises, obligations or
representations made by TeraByte herein.

(g) HEIRS AND ASSIGNS. This Agreement shall be binding on and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs, executors,
administrators, successors and assigns of the parties hereto, but nothing in this paragraph shall be construed as a
consent by TeraByte to any assignment of this agreement except as provided hereinabove.

(h) SURVIVAL. The provisions of paragraphs 1(a)(iv), 1(c)(ii) and 3 of this Agreement shall survive any termination or
expiration of this Agreement.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 214 of 218


TeraByte Unlimited (Full-Use) License Agreement
(Revised May 24, 2017)

PLEASE READ THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE UPGRADING, COPYING, INSTALLING OR
USING THE ACCOMPANYING SOFTWARE PROGRAM (the “Software”).
THIS AGREEMENT SETS FORTH THE STANDARD FULL-USE LICENSE FOR USE OF THE SOFTWARE ON YOUR
COMPUTER SYSTEM. IN ORDER TO USE THE SOFTWARE UNDER THIS FULL-USE LICENSE, YOU MUST
PURCHASE, OR HAVE PURCHASED, EITHER:
a) ONE OR MORE COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE WITH FULL-USE LICENSE RIGHTS, FROM TERABYTE OR
A TERABYTE-AUTHORIZED LICENSING AGENT, OR
b) FULL-USE LICENSE RIGHTS FROM TERABYTE OR A TERABYTE-AUTHORIZED LICENSING AGENT FOR
ONE OR MORE TIME-LIMITED "EVALUATION VERSION" COPIES OF THE SOFTWARE ALREADY IN
YOUR POSSESSION.
THERE MAY BE AN ACTIVATION PROCESS DESCRIBED IN THE SOFTWARE, PURCHASE RECEIPT OR IN
TERABYTE DOCUMENTATION THAT MUST BE FOLLOWED OR YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE MAY BE LIMITED
OR PREVENTED.
If you do not agree to all of the terms and conditions of this License Agreement as set forth below, then: (a) do not
install, upgrade, copy or use the Software, (b) if you received any registration codes or serial numbers, do not copy, use,
retain or disclose any of those registration codes or serial numbers, and (c) if you purchased packaged copies of the
Software with full-use rights, you may return the complete package, unused, to your place of purchase within fifteen (15)
days after purchase for a refund. The exercise of any or all of the rights set forth below constitutes acceptance of
all of the terms and conditions of the Agreement. Where you have received a signed Agreement directly from
TeraByte, any discrepancy between that signed Agreement and an unsigned Agreement shall be controlled by the signed
Agreement.
As further set forth below, TeraByte Inc., dba TeraByte Unlimited ("TeraByte") and/or its suppliers own the Software and
its documentation, which are protected under applicable copyright, trade secrets, and other laws. The Software is
licensed, not sold. Your rights and license to use the Software and the documentation are limited to the terms and subject
to the conditions set forth in this Agreement.
1. LICENSE:
(a) YOU MAY:
(i) (Single Copy License) if you paid for a single copy license, use the Software on a single computer that
you or your organization owns or controls (“Computer System”), as further described in 1(c) below;
(ii) (Multiple Copy License) if you paid for a multiple copy license, make and use the number of Software
copies for which you paid, provided that you may only use each copy of the Software as described in (i)
above;
(iii) (Transfer of Installation) physically transfer any installed, licensed copy of the Software from one
Computer System (the “Old System”) to another Computer System (the “New System”), provided that that
copy may be installed on only one Computer System at a time, and further provided that when you make
the transfer, you must uninstall and remove any and all copies of the Software from the Computer System
from which the programs are transferred. Where uninstalling from the Old System is impossible due to
such Old System being damaged or otherwise non-functional, the requirement for such uninstall and
removal shall be waived unless and until such Old System becomes functional. Such transfer shall be
permitted (a) when the New System is a replacement for the Old System, or (b) with written approval from
TeraByte. Unless otherwise authorized by TeraByte, in writing, each licensed copy of the Software shall
be licensed for one and only one Computer System. Such shall be the case whether or not the Software is
installed on a disk drive permanently attached to the Computer System for which the Software may be
licensed. Specifically, installation upon portable media including without limitation flash drives and CDs
shall not circumvent the requirement of maintaining a license for the Software on each Computer System
on which the Software may be used, although it is permissible for Software installed upon a portable drive
or other drive accessible from multiple Computer Systems to be executed upon more than one such
system, provided that licenses are maintained for each Computer System on which such Software may be
executed;
(iv) (Backup Copy) make a copy of each licensed copy of the Software solely for purposes of backup;
(v) (Images) create and keep "per computer" Images, as described in paragraph 1(e)(i) below, if the Software
product, as licensed, provides imaging functionality; and
(vi) (Image Deployment) if you paid for additional “Image Deployment” license rights, create and distribute
additional Images as described in paragraph 1(e)(ii) below.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 215 of 218


PROVIDED IN ALL CASES THAT all copyright and other proprietary and Federal acquisition notices, as
included by TeraByte with the Software, be fully and accurately reproduced by you on any and all copies of the
Software.
(b) YOU MAY NOT: (i) permit others to use the Software unless they are properly licensed by TeraByte, either
under this Agreement or another agreement from TeraByte, nor install or use the Software on any computer or
computer-related device except Computer Systems as authorized in (a) above; (ii) under a single use license,
install a copy of the Software on one Computer System and also use it on one or more other Computer
Systems (no less than a two (2) copy license would be required for such use); (iii) permit concurrent use of any
copy of the Software; (iv) modify, translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or create derivative
works based on, the Software; (v) copy the Software except as expressly permitted above; (vi) rent, lease, grant
a security interest in, or otherwise transfer rights to, or possession of, the Software or any copy thereof, unless
properly licensed by TeraByte, under another agreement that specifically permits such action; (vii) remove or
alter any proprietary notices, labels or legends on any copy of the Software; (viii) ship or transmit (directly or
indirectly) any copies of the Software or their media, or any direct product thereof, to any country or destination
prohibited by the United States Government; or (ix) disclose serial numbers or registration codes to others,
unless they are properly licensed to receive such information, either under this Agreement or another
agreement from TeraByte.
(c) PERMITTED END USERS AND COMPUTER SYSTEMS.
(i) Commercial or Organizational Use. If you are a corporation, LLC, or other commercial entity, whether
public or private, for profit or not-for-profit, or a government entity, or if the Software is ever used for
purposes related to any such commercial or government entity, the permitted Software end users and
Computer Systems under this license are, as applicable:
(1) Your own employees and in-house contractors, and your in-house Computer Systems owned or
controlled by you,
(2) A parent organization that has majority ownership or control of your organization (if any), its
employees and in-house contractors, and that organization’s in-house Computer Systems owned or
controlled by that organization,
(3) Your subsidiary organization or organizations (if any), those organizations’ employees and in-house
contractors, and those organization’s in-house Computer Systems owned or controlled by those
organizations, and
(4) Your affiliated organizations (if any; “affiliated organization” means any organization which is under
majority control or ownership by the same parent that majority owns or majority controls you), those
organizations’ employees and in-house contractors, and those organization’s in-house Computer
Systems owned or controlled by those organizations.
(ii) Personal or Home Users. If you are a real person, and if all Software under this license is used
exclusively for personal non-commercial use only, then each licensed copy may be installed on four
additional Computer Systems owned or controlled by you, or a member of your immediate family in the
same household.
“Control”: For purposes of this Agreement, a person or entity “controls” a Computer System when he, she or it
has actual control over the day-to-day use of that Computer System.
(d) RESERVATION OF RIGHTS. All rights and licenses not expressly granted by TeraByte in this Agreement are
entirely and exclusively reserved to TeraByte.
(e) IMAGE LICENSES. If the Software’s functionality, as licensed, includes the ability to create one or more disk
partition images or otherwise copy one or more partitions (“Images") then the use of each Image is subject to all
of the conditions and restrictions of this Agreement.

Your rights to create and distribute Images are based on the Software licensed and the type of license you
purchased (as may be indicated on your sales receipt or comparable sales documentation received by you from
TeraByte):
(i) "PER COMPUTER" IMAGE LICENSE: Each licensed copy of the Software includes, without extra charge, a
"per computer" license to create and keep Images for the same Computer System(s) on which you are licensed
to use the Software itself; those Images may not be distributed to, or used in any manner with, any other
computers (except for direct replacements for such systems as provided in subsection 1(a)(iii) above), nor may
you create or retain images for additional Computer Systems unless the previously created images are
destroyed, or you purchased additional licenses to cover such Computer Systems. You may create and keep
an unlimited number of Images for each licensed Computer System. For example, if you purchased a license
for five (5) copies of the Software, then you may create and keep an unlimited number of Images for up to five
Computer Systems with which you properly use those 5 Software copies as described in 1(a)(i) and 1(a)(ii)
above, but you may not distribute those Images to, or use them with, any other Computer System.

(ii) ”IMAGE DEPLOYMENT” LICENSE. If, in addition to the standard Software license, you purchased an
“Image Deployment" license (as indicated on your sales receipt from TeraByte), then: (A) you may make an

Image for DOS User Manual Page 216 of 218


unlimited number of Images on any Computer System on which you may use the Software under this license,
and (B) you may deploy each Image to other Computer Systems, referred to as “deployment computers,” each
such deployment computer having been provided an Image Deployment license. Image Deployment licenses
remain allocated to such deployment computers until and unless such deployment computer is taken out of
service and replaced. In such case, said Image Deployment license may be transferred to such replacement
system subject to limitations as provided in subsection 1(a)(iii) above. For the right to distribute Images to
additional computers, you will need to purchase additional Image Deployment License rights from TeraByte.
Images deployed as described herein may only be restored or referenced on Computer Systems having been
licensed with at least an Image Deployment license, and once restored, may not be moved to any Computer
System not so licensed without prior authorization from TeraByte.

(f) PARTITION MANAGEMENT LICENSING. If the Software’s functionality, as licensed, includes the ability to
create, resize, slide or otherwise manage partitions on a hard drive, or otherwise to control or repair system
boot parameters, then the use of each such reparation or partition management change is likewise subject to all
of the conditions and restrictions of this Agreement, including without limitation, restriction of use of such
reparation or partition management change to Computer Systems licensed hereunder.

2. TERM AND TERMINATION: This Agreement, and your license rights hereunder, remain effective until this
Agreement is terminated.
(a) Termination by You. You may terminate it at any time by destroying the distribution media together with all of
your copies of the Software in any form.
(b) Termination for Breach. This Agreement may be terminated by TeraByte upon notice, at its sole discretion, if
you fail to completely remedy any breach by you of any term or condition herein within ten (10) days after notice
of such breach is delivered by TeraByte to you,
(c) Automatic Termination. This Agreement will automatically terminate without notice if your normal business
operations are disrupted or discontinued for more than thirty days by reason of insolvency, bankruptcy,
receivership, or business termination. Upon termination of this Agreement, you must destroy all copies of the
Software in any form.

3. OWNERSHIP AND CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION: TeraByte or its licensors own the Software under copyright,
trade secret and all other laws that may apply. All product names, designs, and logos associated with the Software
are trademarks of TeraByte. The source code of the Software and all information regarding the design, structure or
internal operation of the Software are valuable trade secrets of TeraByte or third parties with which TeraByte has
licensing arrangements ("Confidential Information"), provided however, that "Confidential Information" shall not
include information which otherwise would be Confidential Information to the extent that such information was
publicly known or otherwise known to you previously to the time of disclosure, which subsequently became known
through no act or omission by you, or which otherwise became known to you other than through disclosure by
TeraByte without violation of any party's obligations to TeraByte. You shall not sell, transfer, publish, disclose,
display or otherwise permit access to any Confidential Information by any third party, nor may you use any of the
Confidential Information, except strictly as part of the Software in the form originally distributed by TeraByte.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY: TeraByte Unlimited warrants that for a period of thirty (30) days from the date of purchase,
the Software will perform in conformity with the user documentation supplied by TeraByte, provided that your
EXCLUSIVE REMEDY under this warranty shall be to return the Software to TeraByte in exchange for repair,
replacement, or a full refund of your purchase price (at TeraByte's option) within forty-five (45) days after the date of
purchase. In addition, the above warranty does not apply to the extent that any failure of the Software to perform as
warranted is caused by the Software being (a) not used in accordance with the user documentation, or (b) modified
by any person other than authorized TeraByte personnel. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTY GRANTED
IMMEDIATELY ABOVE, TERABYTE MAKES NO WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO
THE SOFTWARE, ITS MERCHANTABILITY, OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE. YOU
ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT YOU HAD FULL OPPORTUNITY TO USE AND TEST THE SOFTWARE
BEFORE PURCHASE. TERABYTE DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS OR THAT THE OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR
FREE. YOU ASSUME FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR SELECTING AND USING THE SOFTWARE, AND THAT IF
YOU USE THE SOFTWARE IMPROPERLY OR AGAINST INSTRUCTIONS, YOU CAN CAUSE DAMAGE TO
YOUR FILES, SOFTWARE, DATA OR BUSINESS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE IS BORNE BY YOU. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES
AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THE AGREEMENT. Some jurisdictions do not allow exclusions of an implied warranty, so
this disclaimer may not apply to you and you may have other legal rights that vary by jurisdiction.
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. ANY LIABILITY OF TERABYTE WILL BE LIMITED EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT
REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE. IN ADDITION, IN NO EVENT WILL TERABYTE, NOR ANY
OTHER PERSON OR ENTITY INVOLVED IN THE CREATION, PRODUCTION, OR DELIVERY OF THE
SOFTWARE, BE LIABLE FOR INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOSS OF INCOME, USE OR INFORMATION, RELATING

Image for DOS User Manual Page 217 of 218


EITHER TO THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE, OR YOUR RELATIONSHIP WITH TERABYTE, EVEN IF TERABYTE
HAS BEEN ADVISED IN ADVANCE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES OR CLAIMS. Any suit or other
legal action relating in any way to this Agreement or to the Software must be filed or commenced no later than one
(1) year after it accrues. You may also have other rights which vary from state to state.
6. HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use on
equipment or software running in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, including but not limited
to the operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life
support machines, or weapons systems, in which the failure of the Software could contribute to death, personal
injury, or severe physical or environmental damage ("High Risk Activities"). TERABYTE AND ITS SUPPLIERS
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS OF THE SOFTWARE FOR
HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES. TERABYTE DOES NOT AUTHORIZE USE OF THE SOFTWARE FOR ANY HIGH RISK
ACTIVITY. YOU AGREE TO DEFEND AND INDEMNIFY TERABYTE, AND HOLD TERABYTE HARMLESS, FROM
AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS, ACTIONS, LOSSES, COSTS JUDGMENTS AND DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND IN CONNECTION WITH USE IN RELATION TO ANY HIGH RISK ACTIVITY OF ANY COPY OF THE
SOFTWARE RELATING TO THIS LICENSE.
7. RESTRICTED RIGHTS - COMMERCIAL COMPUTER SOFTWARE. The parties acknowledge and agree that: (a)
any and all products covered by this Agreement are, and shall be, deemed "commercial computer software" for all
purposes in relation to U.S. government acquisition laws, rules and regulations, and (b) all use, duplication and
disclosure by, for, or on behalf of the U.S. Government is subject to all conditions, limitations and restrictions
applicable to "commercial computer software" as set forth in FAR section 12.212 and in DFAR sections 227.7202-1,
227.7202-3, and 227.7202-4.
8. GENERAL.
(a) ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between you and TeraByte in regard
to the subject matter herein, and supersedes all previous and contemporaneous agreements, proposals and
communications, written or oral between you and TeraByte. No amendment of this Agreement shall be effective
unless it is in writing and signed by duly authorized representatives of both parties.
(b) NON-WAIVER. Waiver by TeraByte of any violation of any provision of this License shall not be deemed to
waive any further or future violation of the same or any other provision.
(c) LAW AND JURISDICTION. This License and any dispute relating to the Software or to this License shall be
governed by the laws of the United States and the laws of the State of Nevada, without regard to U.S. or
Nevada choice of law rules. You agree and consent that jurisdiction and proper venue for all claims, actions
and proceedings of any kind relating to TeraByte or the matters in this License shall be exclusively in courts
located in Las Vegas, Nevada. If a court with the necessary subject matter jurisdiction over a given matter
cannot be found in Las Vegas, then jurisdiction for that matter shall be exclusively in a court with the proper
jurisdiction as close to Las Vegas as possible, and within Nevada if possible.
(d) SEVERABILITY. If any part or provision of this License is held to be unenforceable for any purpose, including
but not limited to public policy grounds, then you agree that the remainder of the License shall be fully
enforceable as if the unenforceable part or provision never existed.
(e) NON-ASSIGNMENT. You may not assign this License without the prior written consent of TeraByte, except as
part of a sale of all or substantially all of the assets of your business.
(f) NO THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARIES. There are no third party beneficiaries of any promises, obligations or
representations made by TeraByte herein.
(g) HEIRS AND ASSIGNS. This Agreement shall be binding on and shall inure to the benefit of the heirs,
executors, administrators, successors and assigns of the parties hereto, but nothing in this paragraph shall be
construed as a consent by TeraByte to any assignment of this agreement except as provided hereinabove.
(h) SURVIVAL. The provisions of paragraphs 1(b)(iv), 1(b)(vii), 1(b)(ix), 2, 3 and 6 of this Agreement shall survive
any termination or expiration of this Agreement.

Image for DOS User Manual Page 218 of 218

You might also like